Toshiba VCR RD XV47KE User Manual

COV_E3B90ED_EN.fm Page 1 Friday, February 9, 2007 11:06 AM  
HDD & DVD / Video Cassette Recorder  
RD-XV47KE  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
OPERATIONS  
GUIDE  
HDD/DVD  
I/  
VCR  
PROGRAM  
REC  
DUBBING  
VCR  
HDD  
DVD  
REC  
VCR DVD  
HDD  
DVD  
ON  
/
STANDBY  
DVD  
HDD  
Printed in China  
1VMN23421 / E3B90ED ★★★★  
© 2007 Toshiba Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 2 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Introduction  
Precautions  
: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE  
WARNING  
THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
The lightning flash with  
CAUTION  
arrowhead symbol, within an  
equilateral triangle, is intended to  
alert the user to the presence of  
uninsulated “dangerous voltage”  
within the product’s enclosure that  
may be of sufficient magnitude to  
constitute a risk of electric shock  
to persons.  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
CAUTION:  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT  
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE  
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED  
SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
The exclamation point within an  
equilateral triangle is intended  
to alert the user to the presence  
of important operating and  
maintenance (servicing)  
instructions in the literature  
accompanying the appliance.  
The important note is located on the rear of the cabinet.  
Laser Safety  
This unit employs a laser. Only a qualified service  
personnel should remove the cover or attempt to  
service this unit, due to the possibility of eye injury.  
Caution  
1. Do not attempt to open the cabinet. There are no  
parts inside you can service. Refer all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
2. Slots and openings in the cabinet at the sides and  
underneath are provided for ventilation. To ensure  
reliable operation and to protect the unit from  
overheating, these openings must not be blocked  
or covered.  
Avoid installation in enclosed spaces such as  
bookcases unless suitable ventilation is provided.  
3. Keep the unit away from radiators and other heat  
sources.  
4. Avoid use near strong magnetic fields.  
5. Do not push objects of any kind into the unit  
through the cabinet slots or openings as they  
could touch electrically live parts or short circuit  
parts resulting in a fire or electric shock.  
6. Do not spill liquid on the unit. If liquid is spilled  
and enters the unit, consult qualified service  
personnel.  
CAUTION: USE OF CONTROLS OR  
ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE  
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN  
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY  
RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION  
EXPOSURE.  
CAUTION: VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER  
RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND  
INTERLOCK DEFEATED. DO NOT  
STARE INTO BEAM.  
LOCATION: INSIDE, NEAR THE DECK  
MECHANISM.  
Power Supply  
The power supply is connected and the unit is live  
when the mains cable is plugged into a 220–240 V ,  
50 Hz AC outlet. To operate the unit, press  
7. Do not stand the unit vertically. Use the unit in a  
horizontal (flat) position only.  
8. This product is in Stand-by mode when turned off  
while the mains cable is connected.  
[
ON / STANDBY].  
9. Do not place any combustible objects on the  
device (candles, etc.).  
10. Before moving the unit, be sure to remove any  
discs and unplug the mains cable from the AC  
outlet.  
WARNING: LIVE PARTS INSIDE.  
DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS.  
11. Disconnect the mains plug to shut off when find  
troubles or not in use.  
12. The mains plug shall remain readily operable.  
13. Read both manual instructions to ensure correct  
and safe installation and interconnection of the  
unit in multimedia systems.  
14. Keep the distances 20 cm around apparatus of  
ventilation openings.  
EN  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 3 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Declaration of Conformity  
This product complies with the requirement of the  
directives  
Installation Location  
For safety and optimum performance of this unit:  
• Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position.  
• Do not place anything directly on top of the unit.  
• Do not place the unit directly on top of the TV.  
• Shield the unit from direct sunlight and keep away  
from sources of intense heat. Avoid dusty or humid  
locations. Avoid locations with insufficient ventilation  
for suitable heat dissipation. Do not block the  
ventilation holes on the sides of the unit. Avoid  
locations subject to strong vibration or strong  
magnetic fields.  
EMC-Directive:  
Low Voltage Directive: 73 / 23 / EEC  
CE Marking: 93 / 68 / EEC  
89 / 336 / EEC  
We declare that the following product:  
HDD & DVD / Video Cassette Recorder  
Model RD-XV47KE  
Trade Name: TOSHIBA  
is in compliance with following Regulations.  
EN55013: 2001+A1:2003, EN55020:  
2002+A1:2003+A2:2005, EN61000-3-2:  
2003+A2:2005, EN61000-3-3: 1995 + A1: 2001  
EN60065: 2002  
Avoid the Hazards of Electrical Shock  
and Fire  
EN60825-1 Edition 1.2: 2001  
• Do not handle the mains cable with wet hands.  
• Do not pull on the mains cable to disconnect it from  
AC outlet. Grasp it by the plug.  
• If the water is spilled onto the unit accidentally,  
unplug the mains cable immediately and take the  
unit to an Authorised Service Centre for servicing.  
A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING  
Moisture Condensation Warning  
This product’s packaging materials are recyclable  
and can be reused. Please dispose of any  
materials in accordance with your local recycling  
regulations.  
Moisture condensation may occur inside the unit  
when it is moved from a cold place to a warm place,  
after heating a cold room, or under conditions of high  
humidity. Do not use the unit for at least 2 hours to  
allow the inside to dry.  
This product consists of materials  
which can be recycled and reused if  
disassembled by a specialised  
company.  
About Copyright  
Batteries should never be thrown  
away or incinerated but disposed of  
in accordance with your local  
regulations concerning chemical  
wastes.  
Unauthorised copying, broadcasting, public  
performance and lending of discs are prohibited.  
This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other  
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright  
protection technology must be authorised by  
Macrovision, and is intended for home and other  
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorised  
by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly  
is prohibited.  
Make your contribution to the environment!!!  
• Exhausted batteries do not belong in  
the dustbin.  
• You can dispose of them at a collection  
point for exhausted batteries or special  
waste.  
Notice for the Progressive Scan  
Outputs  
Consumers should note that not all high definition  
television sets are fully compatible with this product  
and may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture.  
In case of picture problems with 525 or 625  
• Contact your council for details.  
For Customer Use:  
Carefully read the Model No. and Serial No.  
located at the back of the unit and enter the  
information below. Retain this information for  
future reference.  
Model No. _____________________  
Serial No. _____________________  
progressive scan output, it is recommended that the  
user switch the connection to the ‘standard definition’  
output. If there are questions regarding your TV set  
compatibility with this 525p or 625p HDD & DVD  
player, please contact our customer service centre.  
EN  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 4 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Accessories Supplied  
• Remote control with two R6 (AA) batteries  
Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol  
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
PROG.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
.
@/  
:
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
PROG.  
GHI  
SATELLITE  
LINK  
PQRS  
TUV  
CHAPTER  
MARK  
SPACE AV SELECT MODE  
TIME SLIP SETUP  
DISC MENU  
AUDIO  
CLEAR  
“Dolby® Digital Stereo Creator enables consumers  
to create stereo DVD-Videos with stunning Dolby  
Digital sound tracks at home. The technology,  
when utilized instead of PCM recording, also  
saves recordable disc space, allowing for higher  
video resolution or extended recording time on  
each DVD. DVDs mastered using Dolby Digital  
Stereo Creator will play back on all DVD-Video  
players.”  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
DISPLAY  
RETURN  
V
ARIABLE  
VARIABLE  
SKIP  
KIP  
REPLA  
Y
SLOW/REV  
-ADJUST  
PLA  
Y
FWD/SLOW  
STOP  
ADJUST+  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
HDD  
REC MODE  
REC  
1.3x/0.8x  
PLA  
REPEAT  
SEARCH  
Y
DUBBING  
SE-R0274  
• RF cable  
Note: This is true when the players are compatible  
with actual recordable DVD discs.  
• Owner’s Manual  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered  
trademarks of DTS, Inc.  
Owner's Manual  
DivX, DivX Certified, and  
associated logos are  
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and  
are used under license.  
• Quick Setup Guide  
EN  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 5 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
VCR  
AUTO HEAD CLEANING  
Maintenance  
• Automatically cleans video heads as you insert or  
remove a videotape, so that you can see a clear  
picture.  
SERVICING  
• Please refer to relevant topics on the  
“Troubleshooting” on pages 103 to 107 before  
returning the unit.  
• If this unit becomes inoperative, do not try to correct  
the problem by yourself. There are no user-  
serviceable parts inside. Turn the unit off, unplug the  
mains cable, and consult your dealer or an  
Authorised Service Centre.  
• Playback picture may become blurred or interrupted  
while the TV programme reception is clear. Dirt  
accumulated on the video heads after a long  
extended period of use, or the usage of rental or  
worn tapes can cause this problem. If a streaky or  
snowy picture appears during playback, the video  
heads in the unit may need to be cleaned.  
1. Please visit your local Audio / Video store and  
purchase a good quality VHS Video Head Cleaner.  
2. If a Video Head Cleaner does not solve the  
problem, please consult your dealer or an  
Authorised Service Centre.  
CLEANING THE CABINET  
• Use a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild  
detergent solution. Do not use a solution containing  
alcohol, spirits, ammonia or abrasive.  
Note  
HDD  
HDD HANDLING  
• Remember to read the instructions along with the  
video head cleaner before use.  
• Clean video heads only when problems occur.  
• HDD is a precision apparatus that is susceptible to  
vibration, strong impact or dirt.  
Depending on the installation environment or  
handling, the unit may become partially damaged or  
in the worst case, recording or replaying may not be  
available. Especially while the HDD is in motion, do  
not subject it to vibration or strong impact or pull out  
the power plug. And if a power failure occurs, the  
content of the recording / replaying programme may  
be lost.  
HDD  
MOVING THE UNIT  
• HDD rotates at high speed when in operation. Be  
sure that rotation has stopped and then move the  
unit without subjecting it to strong impact or  
vibration.  
DVD  
CLEANING DISCS  
• When a disc becomes dirty, clean it with a cleaning  
cloth. Wipe the disc from the centre out. Do not wipe  
in a circular motion.  
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner,  
commercially available cleaners, detergent,  
abrasive cleaning agents or antistatic spray  
intended for analogue records.  
DVD  
CLEANING THE DISC LENS  
• If this unit still does not perform properly although  
you refer to the relevant sections and to  
“Troubleshooting” in this Owner’s Manual, the laser  
optical pickup unit may be dirty. Consult your dealer  
or an Authorised Service Centre for inspection and  
cleaning of the laser optical pickup unit.  
DVD  
DISC HANDLING  
• Handle the discs so that fingerprints and dust do not  
adhere to the surfaces of the discs.  
• Always store the disc in its protective case when it is  
not used.  
EN  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 6 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Table of Contents  
Introduction ............................................ 2  
Precautions ........................................................... 2  
Features................................................................ 7  
Choosing a Disc.................................................... 9  
Guide to the Owner’s Manual.............................. 15  
Functional Overview............................................ 16  
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control........... 20  
HDD / DVD / VCR Modes Switching................... 20  
Guide to Display Information............................... 21  
Guide to Setup Menu .......................................... 21  
Front Panel Display Guide .................................. 22  
Playback................................................60  
Information on Playback...................................... 60  
Basic Playback .................................................... 61  
PBC Function for Video CDs............................... 68  
Special Playback ................................................. 69  
Repeat / Programme Playback / Slide Show....... 73  
Search ................................................................. 74  
Selecting the Format of Audio and Video............ 75  
Editing ...................................................77  
Guide to the Editing on this Unit.......................... 77  
Adding or Deleting Chapter Marks Manually....... 78  
Creating Titles to a Playlist.................................. 79  
Deleting Titles...................................................... 81  
Deleting a Scene of a Title .................................. 82  
Editing Title Names ............................................. 84  
Protecting / Undo Protecting Titles...................... 85  
Combining Titles.................................................. 86  
Dividing a Title..................................................... 87  
Connections ......................................... 23  
Connections ........................................................ 23  
Basic Setup........................................... 26  
For the First Time Use ........................................ 26  
OSD Language Setting ....................................... 27  
Channel Setting................................................... 27  
Setting the Clock................................................. 30  
Selecting the Sound Mode.................................. 32  
Selecting the TV Aspect Ratio ............................ 32  
Function Setup .....................................89  
Tour of the Setup Menus..................................... 89  
Initial Setting........................................................ 92  
Digital Audio Setting ............................................ 93  
Playback.............................................................. 94  
Recording ............................................................ 98  
Display................................................................. 99  
Recording ............................................. 34  
Information on Supported Media......................... 34  
Formatting a Disc................................................ 38  
Deleting All Contents in HDD.............................. 39  
Setting Bilingual Recording Audio....................... 40  
Recording Audio Select (XP) .............................. 41  
Basic Recording.................................................. 42  
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)..................... 42  
Timer Recording.................................................. 43  
Setting External Input Audio................................ 46  
Satellite Link........................................................ 47  
Information on Dubbing....................................... 48  
Setting for External Connection (AV3) ................ 56  
Dubbing from the External Devices..................... 56  
Finalising a Disc.................................................. 57  
Setting Disc Protection........................................ 58  
VCR Functions....................................100  
Playback............................................................ 100  
Recording and One-touch Timer Recording  
(OTR)................................................................. 100  
Search ............................................................... 101  
Other Operations............................................... 102  
Changing the Video Colour System .................. 102  
Hi-Fi Stereo Sound System............................... 102  
Others..................................................103  
Troubleshooting................................................. 103  
Language Code................................................. 108  
Glossary ............................................................ 109  
Specifications .................................................... 110  
EN  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 7 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Dubbing  
With this unit, you can enjoy bi-directional dubbing  
with HDD, DVD or VCR.  
Features  
The following features are available with this unit.  
HDD  
DVD  
Fast Dubbing [  
Page 48]  
Recording  
This feature offers you the dubbing speed of 32 times  
the SLP mode dubbing for DVD-RW / R and 9.6 times  
the LP mode dubbing for DVD+RW / R at the  
maximum.  
This unit allows you to record on the HDD, a  
DVD-RW / +RW disc (rewritable) and a DVD-R / +R  
disc (one-time write) as well as a videotape. You can  
choose any one for your convenience.  
Just Dubbing [  
Page 54]  
HDD  
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)  
Page 42] (HDD/DVD) or [ Page 101] (VCR)  
DVD  
VCR  
When dubbing from HDD to DVD, if you set the Rec  
Mode to Auto, the Rec Mode will automatically be  
adjusted so the titles will fit nicely in the remaining  
space of the disc when there is not enough space in  
the disc. When dubbing from DVD to HDD, the Rec  
Mode will automatically be adjusted for the titles to fit  
a 4.7 GB DVD.  
[
This feature allows you to start the recording right  
away with just one-touch. And each press of  
[REC I] (HDD/DVD/VCR) increases the recording  
time by 15 minutes up to 4 hours.  
Left Channel Stereo Recording  
Playback  
The unit can record monaural sound from the left  
channel as pseudo stereo sound (same left and right  
channels) automatically. (AV3 only)  
HDD  
Simultaneous Playback and Recording  
[
Page 71]  
HDD  
Timer Programming up to 32 Programmes  
Pages 43-46]  
You can programme the unit to record up to 32  
programmes within a month period. Daily or weekly  
repeating programmes can also be programmed.  
DVD  
You can play back a title while recording.  
[
HDD DVD  
Theatre-quality Sound at Home [  
When connecting the unit to an amplifier or a decoder  
that is compatible with Dolby Digital or DTS, you can  
experience a theatre-quality sound environment.  
Page 24]  
HDD  
Variable Skip [  
Page 72]  
160 GB Hard Disc [  
Pages 34-37]  
You can skip forward a certain time, which is specified  
in the Setup Menu in advance, with one-touch while  
playback.  
This unit is equipped with a 160 GB hard disc which  
allows you to record up to 272 hours (with SLP  
mode). The HDD operates just like a VR mode DVD-  
RW disc.  
Most of the functions which are available with a VR  
mode DVD-RW disc can be performed on the HDD  
too.  
Variable Replay [  
Page 72]  
You can skip back a certain time, which is specified in  
the Setup Menu in advance, with one-touch while  
playback.  
VPS / PDC [  
Page 45]  
Title Sorting [  
Page 62]  
This system assures that the TV programme you wish  
to record using Timer Recording will be recorded  
exactly from the beginning to the end even if the  
actual broadcasting time is shifted.  
You can sort and display the titles by order of name or  
date. You can also sort out the unplayed titles (HDD  
only).  
HDD  
Automatic Chapter Marker [  
Page 39]  
Each recorded title is automatically marked with  
chapter marks.  
Time Shift Playback [  
You can play back a title being recorded from the  
beginning while recording continues.  
Page 70]  
DVD  
Automatic DVD Menu Making  
[
Page 57]  
DVD Menus are made automatically when a Video  
mode or +VR mode disc is finalised.  
Automatic Finalise  
[
Page 58]  
You can set the disc to be finalised automatically  
when the disc space runs out.  
Relay Recording [  
Page 44]  
When you Timer Record to DVD, if the disc runs out  
of the space, or if there is no recordable disc in the  
unit, it automatically changes the recording media to  
the HDD.  
EN  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 8 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Editing  
HDD  
Adding or Deleting Chapter Marks Manually  
Page 78]  
DVD  
[
You can add chapter marks to a title.  
Creating Titles to a Playlist (VR mode DVD-RW  
discs and HDD only) [  
You can create a title to the Playlist.  
Deleting Titles [ Page 81]  
Page 79]  
You can delete titles which you do not need anymore.  
Deleting a Scene of a Title (VR mode DVD-RW  
discs and HDD only) [  
Page 82]  
You can delete a specific scene of a title.  
Editing Title Names [ Page 84]  
You can name titles or change the title name.  
Protecting / Undo Protecting Titles (VR mode  
DVD-RW discs, Video mode DVD-RW / R and HDD  
only) [  
Page 85]  
You can prevent accidental editing or title erasing.  
Combining Titles (VR mode DVD-RW discs and  
HDD only) [  
Page 86]  
You can combine two titles into a single title.  
Dividing Titles (VR mode DVD-RW discs and HDD  
only) [  
Page 87]  
You can divide a title into two new titles.  
• It is possible to edit +VR mode recorded / edited on  
other unit, in case you can undo the finalisation of  
the disc on this unit.  
Compatibility  
DVD  
Playing back discs recorded in Video mode on  
any regular DVD player [  
Pages 57-58]  
Discs recorded in Video mode can be played back on  
regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives  
compatible with DVD-Video playback. You will need to  
finalise the discs recorded in Video mode to play back  
in other DVD players.  
Although DVD+RW / R discs are playable on other  
units without finalisation in most cases, it is  
recommended to finalise in order to stabilise the  
performance.  
• DVD-Video Format (Video mode) is a new format for  
recording on DVD-RW / R discs that was approved  
by the DVD Forum in 2000. Adoption of this format  
is optional for manufactures of DVD playback  
devices and there are DVD-Video players,  
DVD-ROM drives and other DVD playback devices  
available that cannot play back DVD-RW / R discs  
recorded in the DVD-Video Format.  
EN  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 9 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Choosing a Disc  
When you want to play back DVD or CD software or copy programmes from the HDD to a recordable DVD, load an  
appropriate disc into the unit. There are many types and formats of discs. Please use the following information to  
select an appropriate disc.  
Note  
• Handle the disc according to the disc instruction manual.  
Toshiba cannot guarantee that all discs bearing the DVD or CD logos will operate as expected.  
Additionally, Toshiba cannot guarantee those discs recorded in this unit will operate properly in other DVD  
players, recorders and/or personal computer drives.  
For Recording / Playback  
Disc  
Mark  
Specification  
Remarks  
Read carefully the section “On DVD-R Discs”  
4.7 GB for General Ver. 2.0 (Page 11).  
DVD-R  
(8 cm (3 1/4 in.))  
(12 cm (4 3/4 in.))  
Depending on the disc status or the recording  
equipment, playback of the disc may not be  
possible on this unit.  
Read carefully the section “On DVD-RW Discs”  
(Page 11).  
Depending on the disc status or the recording  
equipment, playback of the disc may not be  
possible on this unit.  
4.7 GB for Ver. 1.1 and 1.2  
(8 cm (3 1/4 in.))  
(12 cm (4 3/4 in.))  
DVD-RW  
DVD+R  
4.7 GB  
(8 cm (3 1/4 in.))  
(12 cm (4 3/4 in.))  
Read carefully the section “On DVD+R / DVD+RW  
discs” (Page 11). Depending on the disc status on  
the recording equipment, playback of the disc may  
not be possible on this unit.  
4.7 GB  
DVD+RW  
(8 cm (3 1/4 in.))  
(12 cm (4 3/4 in.))  
Using different disc types for different purposes  
DVD-RW / R and DVD+RW / R discs when creating your own original discs for distribution  
DVD-R discs are designed to comply with the global standard DVD-Video format, and can be recorded only once.  
DVD-R / +R discs are convenient when you edit your original content (recorded personal events such as a  
wedding party) with this unit, transfer them to the unit and make copies to send to your friends or relatives. The  
discs can be played back on other compatible DVD players. DVD-RW / +RW discs, which are rewritable, can be  
used as well.  
We cannot guarantee that DVD-RW / R and DVD+RW / R discs recorded on this unit will be playable on all DVD  
recorders/players. Similarly, there is no guarantee that all DVD-RW / R and DVD+RW / R discs recorded on other  
recorders will be playable on this unit.  
EN  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 10 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
For Playback Only  
Disc  
Mark  
Specification  
Remarks  
• 8 cm (3 1/4 in.)  
12 cm (4 3/4 in.)  
• Region number  
The region number of this unit is 2. The region  
number marked on the rear panel must  
correspond to a specific playable area, that is  
printed on your DVD video disc. If you do not  
find Region 2 or ALL regions, or the disc is  
encoded to permit playback only in regions other  
than Region 2, disc playback will not be allowed  
by the unit.  
DVD video  
or  
Audio CD  
(CD-DA)  
• 8 cm (3 1/4 in.)  
12 cm (4 3/4 in.)  
CD-R  
• 12 cm (4 3/4 in.)  
• CD-DA (audio CD)  
format, MP3, JPEG,  
DivX® files  
Depending on the disc status, playback may not  
be possible.  
CD-RW  
Video CD  
(VCD)  
• 12 cm (4 3/4 in.)  
• Version 1.1 and 2.0  
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.  
• You cannot play discs other than those listed above.  
• You cannot play non-standardised discs even if they may be labelled as above.  
• You cannot play discs with specialised encoding (such as Super Audio CD discs) or the DVD audio portions of  
DVD Audio discs.  
Toshiba cannot guarantee that all discs bearing the DVD or CD logos will operate as expected.  
This label indicates playback compatibility with DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video Recording  
Format).  
Note  
• This unit cannot play the DVD-R discs recorded in VR mode (Video Recording Format).  
Toshiba is not liable for any damage or loss caused directly or indirectly by the malfunction of this unit,  
including, without limitation, any one of the following:  
• Failure to record contents intended to be recorded by the consumer.  
• Failure to edit contents as intended by the consumer.  
• When a DVD-RW / R disc and DVD+RW / R disc created on this unit is used (e.g., insertion, playback,  
recording or editing) in another DVD player, recorder or personal computer drive.  
• When a DVD-RW / R disc and DVD+RW / R disc that is used in the manner described in the immediately  
preceding bullet point is used again in this unit.  
• When a DVD-RW / R disc and DVD+RW / R disc that was recorded in another DVD recorder, or in a  
personal computer drive is used in this unit.  
• Some functions may not work with personal computer discs.  
• Discs recorded in this unit may not operate as expected on other DVD players, recorders or personal computer  
drives.  
Because of problems and errors that can occur during the creation of DVD and CD software and/or the manufacture  
of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot guarantee that the unit will play every feature of every DVD bearing the DVD  
logo and/or every CD bearing the CD logo. As one of the creators of DVD technology, Toshiba DVD players are  
manufactured using the highest standards of quality, and as a result, such incompatibilities are rare.  
EN  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 11 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
On DVD-R Discs  
Standards  
Marks on DVD Video Discs  
The following are examples of marks and the  
meanings.  
• DVD-R for General Ver. 2.0 discs can be used for  
recording and playback.  
Mark  
Meanings  
• Discs compatible with the following recording mode  
speed can also be used:  
Ver. 2.0/2x  
Ver. 2.0/4x  
Number of audio streams recorded in  
the disc. (2 streams such as English  
and Japanese in this example.)  
2
Ver. 2.0/8x  
Ver. 2.0/16x  
Number of subtitle languages  
recorded in the disc. (2 subtitle  
languages are recorded in this  
example.)  
• Select discs labelled “for video”, “for recording”,  
“120 min.” etc.  
2
Recording conditions  
• Images for which copying is prohibited or restricted  
(copy once or copy prohibited) cannot be recorded.  
• We strongly recommend using any DVD-R 2x or 8x  
to assure good recording quality.  
Number of camera angles recorded in  
the disc. (3 camera angles are  
recorded in this example.)  
3
Discs that have been tested and are proven to be  
compatible with this unit:  
VERBATIM DVD-R 8x  
Pictures are recorded in the standard  
picture shape (4:3 aspect ratio).  
4:3  
LB  
MAXELL DVD-R  
Pictures are recorded in the letter box  
picture shape (4:3 aspect ratio with  
horizontal black bars in the top and  
bottom of pictures).  
On DVD-RW Discs  
Standards  
• Discs labelled DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 or 1.2 can be used.  
• Discs compatible with the following recording mode  
speeds can also be used:  
Ver. 1.1/2x  
Ver. 1.2/4x  
Pictures are recorded in the 16:9 wide  
picture shape.  
TVs with 4:3 aspect ratio will display  
them in the letter box style.  
16:9 LB  
16:9 PS  
• Select discs labelled “for video”, “for recording”,  
“120 min.” etc.  
Pictures are recorded in the 16:9 wide  
picture shape.  
TVs with 4:3 aspect ratio will display  
them in the pan scan style (one or  
both sides of pictures are cut).  
Recording conditions  
• Images for which copying is prohibited (copy  
prohibited) cannot be recorded. If the disc is labelled  
as CPRM compatible, images for which copying is  
restricted (copy once) can be recorded in VR mode.  
• We strongly recommend using any DVD-RW 4x disc  
to assure good recording quality.  
Actual picture shape may vary  
depending on the aspect ratio or mode  
selection of the TV.  
Discs that have been tested and are proven to be  
compatible with this unit:  
TDK DVD-RW 2x  
JVC DVD-RW 4x  
On DVD+R / DVD+RW Discs  
• DVD+R 1x-16x and DVD+RW 1x-4x discs can be  
used in this unit.  
• We strongly recommend for good recording quality:  
TDK DVD+R 4x/8x/16x, SONY DVD+R 4x/8x/16x,  
MAXELL DVD+R 4x/8x/16x, SONY DVD+RW 4x  
• Discs that have been tested and are proven to be  
compatible with this unit:  
VERBATIM DVD+R 8x VERBATIM DVD+RW 4x  
• Although DVD+RW / R discs are playable on other  
units without finalisation in most cases, it is  
recommended to finalise in order to stabilise the  
performance.  
EN  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 12 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Structure of Disc Contents  
Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and  
the titles are subdivided into chapters.  
On Handling Discs  
• Do not touch the playback side of the disc.  
Video CDs / Audio CDs are divided into tracks.  
Data disc contains MP3/JPEG/DivX® are divided into  
groups, and the groups are subdivided into tracks.  
Yes  
DVD video disc  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3  
Playback side  
• Do not stick paper or tape to discs.  
Video CD/Audio CD  
Track 2 Track 3 Track 4  
No  
Track 1  
Track 5  
Track 5  
On Cleaning Discs  
MP3/JPEG/DivX®  
Group 2  
Track 4  
• Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and  
sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the centre  
outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc  
clean.  
Group 1  
Track 1 Track 2  
Track 3  
No  
Yes  
Title:  
Divided contents of a DVD video disc.  
Roughly corresponds to a story title in short  
stories.  
• Do not use any type of solvent such as thinners,  
benzine, commercially available cleaners or  
antistatic spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the  
disc.  
Chapter: Divided contents of a title. This corresponds  
to a chapter in a story.  
Track:  
Divided contents of a Video CD, an Audio  
CD or data disc contains MP3, JPEG or  
DivX®.  
On Storing Discs  
• Do not store discs in a place subject to direct  
sunlight or near heat sources.  
Group: Divided contents of a MP3, JPEG or DivX®  
data disc. Consists of number of tracks.  
• Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and  
dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier.  
• Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing  
objects on discs outside of their case may cause  
warping.  
Each title, chapter, group or track is assigned a  
number, which is called “title number”, “chapter  
number”, “group number” or “track number”  
respectively.  
Some discs may not have these numbers.  
When you record on the HDD, one recording will  
always equal one title. You can divide a title into  
several chapters by marking borders in it to facilitate  
scene search.  
EN  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 13 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Discs and Purposes  
The table shows main functions which are available on this unit per disc category.  
This will help you choose discs.  
DVD-RW disc Video mode  
Suitable for saving data in  
DVD-RW disc VR mode  
DVD-R disc Video mode  
Characteristics on this unit  
Suitable for saving data in VR Suitable for saving data in  
Video mode format to play on mode format to play on  
Video mode format to play on  
compatible devices.  
compatible devices.  
compatible devices.  
You can erase recorded  
contents to use the disc  
repeatedly.  
You can erase recorded  
contents to use the disc  
repeatedly.  
Once you execute Video  
mode finalising process on a  
recorded disc so that it can be  
played on other players. You  
cannot make additions,  
corrections and deletions of  
contents on the disc.  
For the first use  
Initialise the disc.  
Initialise the disc.  
No preparatory steps required.  
Recording a TV programme  
Erasing recorded contents  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Undo the finalisation of the  
disc first to delete the  
contents.  
Undo the finalisation of the  
disc first to delete the  
contents.  
Deleting contents cannot  
restore the disc space.  
After you execute Video mode  
finalising process on a  
recorded disc, you cannot  
delete contents of the disc.  
Indexing recorded contents  
Naming a title  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Collecting favourite scenes  
(Playlist Editing)  
Making a new title from a  
Playlist containing favourite  
scenes  
No  
Yes  
No  
(Copy within the same disc)  
Playing contents recorded on Execute Video mode finalising Execute VR mode finalising  
Execute Video mode finalising  
process on this unit. This  
process makes the disc  
playable on other compatible  
devices. (Some models  
excepted.)  
this unit, on other devices  
process on this unit. This  
process makes the disc  
playable on other compatible  
devices. (Some models  
excepted.)  
process on this unit. This  
process makes the disc  
playable on other compatible  
devices. (Some models  
excepted.)  
When a message appears and Initialise the disc.  
Initialise the disc.  
the loaded disc cannot be  
used:  
EN  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 14 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
DVD+RW disc +VR mode  
DVD+R disc +VR mode  
Characteristics on this unit  
Suitable for saving data in +VR mode format to Suitable for saving data in +VR mode format to  
play on compatible devices.  
play on compatible devices.  
You can erase recorded contents to use the  
disc repeatedly.  
Once you execute +VR mode finalising  
process on a recorded disc so that it can be  
played on other players. You cannot make  
additions, corrections and deletions of contents  
on the disc.  
For the first use  
Initialise the disc.  
No preparatory steps required.  
Recording a TV programme  
Erasing recorded contents  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Undo the finalisation of the disc first to delete  
the contents.  
Deleting contents cannot restore the disc  
space. After you execute +VR mode finalising  
process on a recorded disc, you cannot delete  
contents of the disc.  
Indexing recorded contents  
Naming a title  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Collecting favourite scenes  
(Playlist Editing)  
Making a new title from a  
Playlist containing favourite  
scenes  
No  
No  
(Copy within the same disc)  
Playing contents recorded on Although DVD+RW discs are playable on other Although DVD+R discs are playable on other  
this unit, on the other unit  
units without finalisation in most cases, it is  
recommended to finalise in order to stabilise  
the performance.  
units without finalisation in most cases, it is  
recommended to finalise in order to stabilise  
the performance.  
When a message appears and Initialise the disc.  
the loaded disc cannot be  
used:  
EN  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 15 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Guide to the Owner’s Manual  
Symbols Used in the Owner’s Manual  
To show what recording mode or disc type applies to  
each function, the following symbols appear at the  
beginning of each operating item.  
Symbol  
Description  
Available to (internal) HDD  
HDD  
Available to DVD-Videos  
DVD-V  
Video  
DVD-RW  
Available to DVD-RW discs in Video  
mode  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Available to DVD-RW discs in VR mode  
Available to DVD-R discs in Video mode  
Available to DVD+RW discs in +VR mode  
Available to DVD+R discs in +VR mode  
Available to Audio CDs  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
CD  
Available to Video CDs  
VCD  
Available to CD-RW / R discs with MP3  
files  
MP3  
Available to CD-RW / R discs with JPEG  
files  
JPEG  
Available to DVD-RW / R, DVD+RW / R  
and CD-RW / R discs with DivX® files  
®
®
DivX  
Available to VHS tapes  
Use only cassettes marked VHS (  
VCR  
).  
PAL  
EN  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 16 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Functional Overview  
Front Panel  
2
3 4  
5 6  
7
8 9 10 11 12  
HDD/DVD  
I/  
VCR  
PROGRAM  
REC  
DUBBING  
VCR  
HDD  
DVD  
REC  
VCR DVD  
HDD  
DVD  
ON  
/
STANDBY  
DVD  
HDD  
AV3  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
L
R
1
15  
20  
19 17 16  
13  
24* 22*  
18  
14*  
25 23* 21  
1
2
ON / STANDBY button: Press to turn the  
unit on / off.  
17 DUBBING HDD DVD button: Press to start  
One Touch Dubbing from HDD to DVD.  
ON / STANDBY indicator: Lights up when  
18 DUBBING VCR DVD button: Press to start  
One Touch Dubbing from VCR to DVD.  
the power is on.  
3
4
Cassette compartment: Insert a tape here.  
REC indicator (VCR): Lights up during VCR  
recording.  
DUBBING indicator: Lights up during dubbing.  
OPEN / CLOSE O button (DVD): Press to  
open / close the disc tray.  
REC indicators (HDD/DVD): Lights up during  
HDD/DVD recording.  
Disc tray: Place a disc here.  
19 PROGRAM  
/
buttons:  
(HDD/DVD): Press to change the channel up or  
down.  
5
6
(VCR): Press to change the channel up or down.  
Press to adjust the tracking during playback or in  
slow motion of the tape.  
While playback is in still mode, you can adjust the  
vertically blurred picture.  
7
8
9
20 Front Panel Display: Shows information and  
messages. Refer to “Front Panel Display Guide”  
on page 22.  
21 I REC button (VCR): Press once to start a  
basic recording. Press repeatedly to start an OTR  
(One-touch Timer Recording). Each press  
increases the recording time by 15 minutes up to  
4 hours.  
22 PLAY Pbutton* (VCR): Press to start playback.  
Press to turn on the unit to start playback.  
23 FWD f button* (VCR): Press to fast forward  
or fast search.  
RESET: Press with a sharp pointed object to  
restart the unit. Also refer to the “Note” right  
below.  
10 S-VIDEO input jack (AV3)  
(HDD/DVD/VCR): Connect the S-Video output  
of an external device here using a commercially  
available S-Video cable.  
11 VIDEO input jack (AV3)  
(HDD/DVD/VCR): Connect the video output of  
an external device here using a commercially  
available Video cable.  
12 AUDIO input jacks (AV3)  
Press to turn on the unit to fast forward.  
24 REW rbutton* (VCR): Press to rewind or  
rewind search.  
(HDD/DVD/VCR): Connect the audio output of  
an external device here using a commercially  
available Audio (L / R) cable.  
Press to turn on the unit to rewind.  
13 I REC button (HDD/DVD): Press once to  
start a basic recording. Press repeatedly to start  
an OTR (One-touch Timer Recording). Each  
press increases the recording time by 15 minutes  
up to 4 hours.  
25 STOP / EJECT O/S button (VCR): Press to  
eject the videotape. Press to stop recording or  
playback.  
(
)You can also turn on the unit by pressing these  
*
buttons.  
14 PLAY Pbutton* (HDD/DVD): Press to start or  
resume playback.  
Note  
15 STOP S button (HDD/DVD): Press to stop  
playback, recording or dubbing.  
16 Device Select Buttons / Indicators:  
VCR: Press to activate the VCR. Lights up when  
VCR is selected.  
After pressing [RESET],  
• The settings for the items listed below will be lost;  
- Clock Setting  
- Timer Programme  
- Resume point  
• The settings for the item listed below will not be lost,  
but need to be set again;  
- Channel Setting  
HDD: Press to activate the HDD. Lights up when  
HDD is selected.  
DVD: Press to activate the DVD. Lights up when  
DVD is selected.  
• All other settings will remain as memorised.  
Button names described in the Owner’s Manual  
The instructions in this manual are described mainly with the operations using the remote control. Some  
operations can be carried out using the buttons on the front panel.  
EN  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 17 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Rear Panel  
HDD / DVD / VCR  
AV2 (DECODER)  
HDD/DVD  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
OUT VIDEO OUT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
L
COAXIAL  
P
/CB  
B
AV1 (TV)  
R
OUT  
P
/CR  
R
1
2
3
4 5 6 7 9  
8
1
2
Mains cable:  
Connect to a standard AC outlet.  
6
7
S-VIDEO OUT jack (HDD/DVD):  
Connect to the S-Video input jack on your TV.  
Use a commercially available S-Video cable.  
AV2(DECODER) (HDD/DVD/VCR):  
Connect to VCR, camcorder, or other  
Audio-Video equipment. Use a commercially  
available Scart cable.  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks  
(HDD/DVD):  
Connect to an optional component video cable  
through the component video input jacks of a TV.  
3
4
AV1(TV) (HDD/DVD/VCR):  
Connect to the Scart socket on your TV. Use a  
commercially available Scart cable.  
8
9
ANTENNA IN (HDD/DVD/VCR):  
Connect to an antenna cable.  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) jack  
(HDD/DVD):  
Connect to an amplifier with a digital input jack  
such as a Dolby Digital decoder, DTS decoder or  
MPEG decoder. Use a commercially available  
Coaxial cable.  
ANTENNA OUT (HDD/DVD/VCR):  
Connect to the Aerial jack on your TV, cable box  
or direct broadcast system.  
Use the supplied RF cable.  
5
AUDIO OUT jacks (HDD/DVD):  
Connect to the audio input jacks on your TV. Use  
a commercially available Audio cable.  
Note  
• Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the rear panel.  
Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.  
• This unit does not have an RF modulator.  
EN  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 18 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Remote Control  
5
SETUP button:  
Press once to display the Setup Menu.  
Press to exit from the present menu.  
DISC MENU button:  
17  
18  
19  
6
7
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
PROG.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
Displays the Disc Menu.  
1
Cursor U / D / L / P buttons:  
Press to move the cursor and determine items or  
settings.  
.@/ :  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
PROG.  
20  
8
9
DISPLAY button:  
2
3
4
5
6
SATELLITE  
LINK  
PQRS  
TUV  
Displays the on-screen menu.  
SKIP B / F buttons (HDD/DVD):  
During playback, press to skip to the previous /  
next chapter or track.  
21  
23  
24  
CHAPTER  
MARK  
22  
25  
SPACE AV SELECT MODE  
TIME SLIP SETUP  
DISC MENU  
AUDIO  
CLEAR  
10 SLOW / REV r button:  
TOP MENU  
(HDD/DVD) During playback, press to play back  
in fast reverse. Or when playback is paused,  
press to play back in slow reverse. During slow  
reverse playback, press to change the speed.  
(VCR) Press to rewind the videotape in stop  
mode or to view the picture rapidly in reverse  
during the playback mode.  
26  
7
ENTER  
27  
28  
DISPLAY  
RETURN  
8
9
VARIABLE VARIABLE  
REPLAY  
SKIP  
SKIP  
29  
31  
11 PLAY P button*:  
SLOW/REV  
-ADJUST  
PLAY  
FWD/SLOW  
30  
32  
Press to start or resume playback.  
If the resume point has been set, the playback will  
start from the resume point.  
10  
STOP  
ADJUST+  
DVD  
11  
*
12  
33  
35  
PAUSE  
VCR  
HDD  
34  
12 -ADJUST  
button (HDD/DVD):  
13  
14  
During playback, press to play backward by one  
frame at a time.  
13 PAUSE p button:  
Press to pause playback or recording.  
14 REC MODE button:  
36  
REC MODE  
REC  
37  
1.3x/0.8x  
PLAY  
REPEAT SEARCH  
DUBBING  
38  
39  
15  
16  
SE-R0274  
Press to select the Rec Mode.  
15 REPEAT button (HDD/DVD):  
Press to play back the chapter, title, group, disc  
and track repeatedly.  
16 SEARCH button:  
(HDD/DVD) Press to call up the chapter / track,  
title or time search menu.  
(VCR) Press to call up the index or time search  
menu.  
(
)
You can also turn on the unit by pressing this  
button.  
*
17 TIMER PROG. button (HDD/DVD):  
Press to display the Timer Programme List.  
1
2
OPEN / CLOSE O button (DVD/VCR):  
(DVD) Press to open / close the disc tray.  
(VCR) Press to eject the videotape.  
Number buttons:  
Press to select channel numbers.  
Press to select a title / chapter / track on the  
display.  
Press to enter setting values.  
Press to enter the index / desired time to search  
in VCR mode.  
18 INPUT SELECT  
button:  
Press to select an external input mode (“AV1”,  
“AV2” or “AV3”).  
ON / STANDBY button:  
Press to turn the unit on / off.  
19  
20 PROG.  
/
buttons:  
(HDD/DVD) Press to change the channel up or  
down.  
(VCR) Press to change the channel up or down.  
Press to adjust the tracking during playback or in  
slow motion of the tape.  
While playback is in still mode, you can adjust the  
vertically blurred picture.  
3
4
CHAPTER MARK button (HDD/DVD):  
Press to add chapter marks on each title  
(HDD, VR mode DVD-RW and +VR mode  
DVD+RW / R).  
21 SATELLITE LINK button:  
Press to activate the Satellite Link Timer  
Recording.  
22 AV SELECT button (HDD/DVD):  
Press to display AV Select Menu.  
TIME SLIP button (HDD):  
Press once to start recording the TV programme  
you are watching. Press again to watch the  
content being recorded from the beginning while  
recording continues.  
EN  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 19 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
23 MODE button:  
32 STOP S button:  
(HDD/DVD) Press to change the Original and  
Playlist on the HDD/DVD title menu.  
When User 1 - User 3 in Picture Quality Menu are  
selected, press to display User Setup Menu.  
(VCR) Press to change the video colour system.  
24 CLEAR button:  
Press to stop playback or recording.  
33 ADJUST+  
button (HDD/DVD):  
During playback, press to advance one frame at a  
time.  
34 VCR button:  
Press to activate the VCR. (See page 20.)  
35 HDD button:  
Press to activate the HDD. (See page 20.)  
36 DVD button:  
(HDD/DVD) Press to clear the information once  
entered, etc.  
Press to delete chapter marks.  
(DVD) Press to erase the track number entered in  
the programme play screen for Video / Audio CDs.  
(VCR) Press to reset the tape counter.  
Press to activate the DVD. (See page 20.)  
37 REC I button:  
Press once to start a basic HDD/DVD/VCR  
recording. Press repeatedly to start a One-touch  
Timer Recording in HDD/DVD/VCR mode.  
38 1.3x/0.8x PLAY button (HDD/DVD):  
During playback, press to play back in a slightly  
faster/slower speed while keeping the audio  
quality.  
25 AUDIO  
button:  
During playback, press to change the audio  
settings.  
26 TOP MENU button (HDD/DVD):  
Displays the Title List.  
27 ENTER button:  
Press to confirm or select menu items.  
28 RETURN button:  
39 DUBBING button:  
Press to start dubbing during HDD/DVD playback.  
Press to display the Dubbing Menu during  
HDD/DVD stop mode and VCR mode.  
Press to return to the previously displayed Menu  
Screen.  
29 VARIABLE SKIP button (HDD/DVD):  
Skips by the amount of time set in advance.  
30 VARIABLE REPLAY button (HDD/DVD):  
Replays by the amount of time set in advance.  
31 FWD / SLOW f button:  
(HDD/DVD) During playback, press to play back  
in fast forward. Or when playback is paused,  
press to play back in slow forward.  
(VCR) During playback, press to play back in fast  
forward.  
Note  
• If you turn off this unit, [OPEN / CLOSE O] on the  
remote control is not available. Be sure to use  
[OPEN / CLOSE O] or [STOP / EJECT O/S] on the  
unit.  
In still mode, press to view the videotape in slow  
motion.  
During playback in slow motion, press to increase  
the speed in slow motion.  
Press to fast forward the videotape in stop mode.  
Button names described in the Owner’s Manual  
The instructions in this manual are described mainly with the operations using the remote control. Some  
operations can be carried out using the buttons on the front panel.  
EN  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 20 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Installing Batteries in the  
Remote Control  
Install two R6 (AA) batteries (supplied) into the  
remote control, carefully match with the polarity  
indicated inside the battery compartment.  
HDD / DVD / VCR Modes  
Switching  
Because this unit is a combination of a VCR, a HDD  
and a DVD recorder, you must select first which  
component you wish to operate.  
1
2
3
Device Select Buttons / Indicators  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
PROG.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
I
/
VCR  
PROGRAM  
HDD/DVD  
REC  
DUBBING  
VCR DVD  
HDD DVD  
VCR  
HDD  
DVD  
REC  
HDD  
DVD  
ON / STANDBY  
.@/  
:
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
PROG.  
GHI  
SATELLITE  
LINK  
PQRS  
TUV  
CHAPTER  
MARK  
Caution  
SPACE AV SELECT MODE  
VCR  
HDD  
DVD  
TIME SLIP SETUP  
DISC MENU  
AUDIO  
CLEAR  
• Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such  
as leakage and bursting.  
DVD button / indicator  
HDD button / indicator  
VCR button / indicator  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
• Do not mix new and old batteries together.  
DISPLAY  
RETURN  
VARIABLE VARIABLE  
SKIP  
REPLAY  
SKIP  
• Do not use different kinds of batteries together.  
SLOW/REV  
-ADJUST  
PLAY  
FWD/SLOW  
• Make sure that the + and - ends of each battery  
match the indications inside the battery  
compartment.  
STOP  
ADJUST+  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
HDD  
VCR button  
HDD button  
DVD button  
REC MODE  
REC  
1.3x/0.8x  
PLAY  
REPEAT SEARCH  
DUBBING  
• Remove batteries if the equipment will not be used  
for a month or more.  
SE-R0274  
• When disposing used batteries, please comply with  
governmental regulations or the public instructions  
for environmental protection that apply in your  
country or area.  
• Do not recharge, short-circuit, heat, burn or  
disassemble batteries.  
HDD mode  
Press [HDD] on the remote control.  
(Verify that the HDD indicator is lit.)  
About the Remote Control  
• Make sure there is no obstacle between the remote  
control and the remote control sensor on the unit.  
• Use within the operating range and angle as shown.  
DVD mode  
Press [DVD] on the remote control.  
(Verify that the DVD indicator is lit.)  
VCR mode  
I
/
ON  
/
S
T
AN  
DB  
Y
Press [VCR] on the remote control.  
(Verify that the VCR indicator is lit.)  
V
C
R
Within about  
7 m  
R
E
C
PR  
OG  
RA  
M
D
UBBING  
VC  
VCR  
R
D
V
D
D
H
D
D
H
D
D
D
D
V
V
D
H
D
D
/D  
V
D
R
E
C
30˚  
H
D
D
D
V
D
Note  
30˚  
OP  
CLOSEN/  
E
TIMER  
PR  
OG  
.
@
/
:
.
SELIN  
PUT  
T
E
C
G
ABC  
HI  
• If you press [REC I] of each device, recording  
PQRS  
JKL  
DE  
F
CH  
MA  
A
RK  
P
TER  
TUV  
MNO  
TIME  
SP  
ACE  
WXYZ  
PR  
OG  
S
LIP  
.
D
A
V
SA  
TELLITE  
LINK  
IS  
C
SETUP  
SE  
ME  
LE  
N
C
R
T
U
A
U
M
D
ODE  
IO  
C
LEA  
T
O
P
EN  
TE  
M
ENU  
R
starts in its device mode.  
Remote control  
• The maximum operable range as follows:  
Line of sight: approximately 7 m  
Either side of centre: approximately 7 m within  
30 degrees  
• Remote control operation may become unreliable if  
the remote control sensor of the unit is being  
exposed by the strong sunlight or fluorescent light.  
• Remote controls for different devices can interfere  
with each other. Be careful when using remote  
controls for other equipment located close to the  
unit.  
• Replace the batteries when the operating range of  
the remote control reduces.  
EN  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 21 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Guide to Display Information  
Guide to Setup Menu  
This unit uses the following on-screen menu for most  
operations.  
The Display Menu gives you all information of the  
HDD or DVD.  
Display Example:  
Press [DISPLAY] once to show all information.  
How to use Setup Menus:  
Press [SETUP] to display “Setup Menu”. Choose  
either menu using [Cursor U / D], then press  
[ENTER]. These menus provide entries to all main  
functions of the unit.  
Press [DISPLAY] four times to exit the display.  
T
13/ 21  
C
3/  
3
00:02:00/00:05:05  
1
2
HDD Resume ON  
HDD Remain: LP 148:14  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
1
2
Editing  
Dubbing  
3
Timer Programme  
Title List  
4
5
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
6
01/01/07(Mon)23:56  
7
3
8
Station : P01 ARD  
Recording  
9
Display  
10  
Press [DISPLAY] once.  
T
13/ 21  
C
3/  
3
00:02:00/00:05:05  
1
2
HDD Resume ON  
HDD Remain: LP 148:14  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Disc Management:  
To set up the disc to manage.  
Editing:  
To edit a recorded disc or HDD.  
Dubbing:  
To dub a content among HDD, DVD and VCR.  
Timer Programme:  
To programme a Timer Recording.  
Title List:  
To select the title list.  
Press [DISPLAY] twice.  
T
13/ 21  
C
3/  
3
00:02:00/00:05:05  
1
Initial Setting:  
To make the settings of the basic items.  
Digital Audio Setting:  
To select the digital audio setting.  
Playback:  
To set up the unit to play discs / HDD as you  
prefer.  
9
Recording:  
To set up the unit to record on discs / HDD as you  
prefer.  
10 Display:  
Press [DISPLAY] thrice.  
Each section includes the information as listed below:  
To set up the OSD screen and the front display of  
the unit as you prefer.  
1
• Current title number / total number of the titles  
• Current chapter number / total number of the  
chapters  
• Elapsed playback time of the current title / total  
time of the title  
• Playback status and Rec Mode  
• Current title status  
Available menus vary among discs.  
2
3
• Remained disc space  
• Current device  
• Date and clock  
• Programme name  
• Station name  
Note  
• This is an example screen only for explanation.  
Displayed items varies depending on the actual mode.  
EN  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 22 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Front Panel Display Guide  
2
1
3
P-SCAN  
DB  
VCR  
HDD  
4
5
DVD  
CD R W  
6
1
Title / Track and Chapter mark  
5
6
Disc type and current status of the unit  
:
Appears when indicating a title / track  
CD : Appears when an Audio CD or a disc with  
®
number.  
MP3 / JPEG / DivX files is on the disc tray.  
:
Appears when indicating a chapter  
number.  
R : Appears when a DVD-R disc or a DVD+R  
disc is loaded on the disc tray.  
RW : Appears when a DVD-RW disc or a  
DVD+RW disc is loaded on the disc tray.  
2
3
P.SCAN  
Appears when the progressive scan is activated.  
Displays the following  
• Played-back time  
• Current title / chapter / track number  
• Recording time  
• Clock  
• Channel number  
• VCR tape counter  
• Remaining time for a One-touch Timer  
Recording  
Current status of the unit  
:
Appears when Timer Recording is in  
Standby, or is proceeding.  
Disappears when all the Timer  
Recordings are finished.  
(Does not appear while in the Satellite  
Link standby mode or the Satellite Link  
Recording is in progress.)  
:
Appears when a videotape is in the unit.  
DB : Lights up during a dubbing process.  
4
I VCR : Lights up during VCR recording.  
I HDD : Lights up during HDD recording.  
I DVD : Lights up during DVD recording.  
Display Messages  
Appears when the  
unit is turning off.  
Appears when the  
unit is turning on.  
Appears when a  
disc is loaded on  
the disc tray.  
Appears when the  
disc tray is opening.  
Appears when the  
DVD-Video is  
playing its menu.  
Appears when the  
disc tray is closing.  
Appears when  
recording is  
stopped.  
Appears when the  
Auto Tuning is  
functioning.  
Appears when the  
Satellite Link  
Recording is in  
standby.  
EN  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 23 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Connections  
To Aerial jack  
Antenna  
Cable  
Signal  
Audio/Video cable (not supplied)  
3
3
or  
3
Scart/RCA cable  
(not supplied)  
Scart cable (not supplied)  
Scart adaptor  
(not supplied)  
2
RF cable  
(supplied)  
HD/ DVD / VCR  
AV2 DECODER)  
HDD/DVD  
DIGAL  
AUO OUT  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
OUT VIDEO OUT  
ANTENNA  
N  
Y
COAXIAL  
L
1
/CB  
B
P
V1 (TV)  
R
OUT  
P
/CR  
R
RF cable  
(not supplied)  
Selecting Progressive Scan (625p <525p> or  
Interlaced 625i <525i>) Playback  
• If your TV is compatible with progressive scanning  
(625p <525p>), connect the TV to the  
Connections  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks of the unit and set  
“Video Out” setting to “Component (Progressive)” in  
the setup menu (see page 92). Next, set your TV to  
the progressive scan mode.  
• If your TV is not compatible with progressive scan,  
set “Video Out” setting to “Component (Interlace)”.  
• Use a commercially available adaptor if the Video  
input jacks of your TVs or monitors are the BNC  
type.  
Connecting to a TV  
Connect the unit to a TV after considering the  
capabilities of your existing equipment.  
Before installation, unplug your TV and this unit.  
Using the Scart socket  
1 Connect the antenna or cable to the  
ANTENNA IN jack of this unit.  
Using the S-VIDEO OUT or the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT jacks and the AUDIO OUT jacks  
2 Connect the ANTENNA OUT jack of  
this unit to the Aerial jack of your TV.  
Use the supplied RF cable.  
If your TV has an S-Video or a Component Video  
input jack, use either an S-Video cable (to connect the  
S-VIDEO OUT jack) or a Component Video cable (to  
connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks), and  
an Audio cable (to connect the AUDIO OUT jacks).  
- S-Video connection provides the good quality  
picture.  
3 Connect AV1(TV) Scart socket of this  
unit to the Scart socket of your TV.  
Use a commercially available Scart  
cable.  
- Component connection provides the better quality  
picture.  
Note  
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 on the left.  
2 Connect S-VIDEO OUT or  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks of  
this unit to the S-Video or  
• If your TV does not have a Scart socket, use a  
commercially available Scart adaptor or Scart / RCA  
cable to connect.  
• Connect this unit directly to the TV. If the AV cables  
are connected to a VCR, pictures may be distorted  
due to the copy protection system.  
• When changing the “Video Out” setting  
(“SCART(RGB)”, “Component (Progressive)” or  
“Component (Interlace)”), connect to a Video jack or  
an S-Video jack on the TV. If the setting is changed,  
for example, to “Component (Progressive)” or  
“Component (Interlace)” while the scart cable is  
connected to the TV, a distorted video signal may be  
output.  
Component Video input jacks of your  
TV. Use a commercially available  
S-Video cable or Component Video  
cable.  
EN  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 24 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
3 Connect the AUDIO OUT jacks of this  
unit to the analogue Audio input  
jacks of your TV. Use a commercially  
available Audio cable.  
Recording from a camcorder or other  
Audio-Video equipment with no Scart output  
socket (AV3)  
If no S-Video input jack is available, connect to  
VIDEO input jack on the front panel using an RCA  
Video cable.  
AUDIO  
IN  
S-VIDEO  
IN  
Component  
Video IN  
Set “S-Video In” when using S-VIDEO input jack.  
(See page 56.)  
Y
PB/CB  
P
/CR  
or  
AV3 (Front)  
Component  
Video cable  
(not supplied)  
S-Video  
cable(not  
supplied)  
Audio cable  
(not supplied)  
HDD/DVD  
DVD / VCR  
HDD/DVD  
DVD  
REC  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
OUT VIDEO OUT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
DECODER)  
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
HDD  
DVD  
COAXIAL  
L
/CB  
P
B
P
1 (TV)  
R
OUT  
/CR  
R
AV3  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
L
R
Note for a TV with no S-Video input jack or Scart  
socket:  
• This unit has no RF modulator, so this type of TV  
cannot be used.  
S-Video cable  
(not supplied)  
Audio cable  
(not supplied)  
• Only component connection is compatible with the  
Progressive Scan.  
S-VIDEO AUDIO  
OUT OUT  
Connecting to External Equipment  
This unit has three input terminals, AV1(TV) or  
AV2(DECODER) on the rear panel and AV3 on the  
front panel. Be sure that all the units are off before  
making any connections.  
Digital Audio for Better Sound Quality  
Digital audio  
input jack  
Dolby Digital decoder,  
DTS decoder or  
MPEG decoder, etc.  
Recording from a HDD / DVD player, VCR,  
Satellite Box or other Audio-Video  
COAXIAL  
equipment with a Scart output socket (AV2)  
Coaxial cable  
(not supplied)  
AV output  
socket (Scart)  
L
COAXIAL  
R
Scart cable (not supplied)  
AV2(DECODER)  
HDD / DVD / VCR  
AV2 (DECODER)  
HDD/DVD  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
OUT VIDEO OUT  
DIGITAL  
HDD/DVD  
AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
OUT VIDEO OUT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
COAXIAL  
L
/CB  
P
B
P
AV1 (TV)  
COAXIAL  
L
/CB  
P
B
P
R
OUT  
/CR  
R
R
OUT  
/CR  
R
Note  
The connections illustrated above are  
optional for better sound.  
• When you record a TV programme from a Satellite  
Box, you must connect a Scart cable to  
AV2(DECODER). (See page 47.)  
1 For clear digital sound quality, use  
the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL)  
jack to connect your digital audio  
equipment.  
• When AV2 is connected, the signal from the AV2 will  
be output automatically. If you want to monitor the  
signal from other input, you must press [DISPLAY]  
first. Then, select the desired input to monitor with  
[INPUT SELECT  
].  
If the audio format of the digital output does not  
match the capabilities of your receiver, the  
receiver will produce a strong, distorted sound or  
no sound at all.  
EN  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 25 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Connecting a Dolby Digital™ decoder, DTS  
decoder or MPEG decoder  
• Connecting Multi-channel Dolby Digital decoder  
allows you to enjoy the Multi-channel Dolby Digital  
surround system as well as DTS decoder, Multi-  
channel surround system.  
• After connecting to a Dolby Digital decoder, set  
“Dolby Digital” to “Bit Stream” in “Digital Audio  
Setting”. (See page 93.)  
• After connecting to a DTS decoder, set “DTS” to  
“On” in “Digital Audio Setting”. (See page 94.)  
• After connecting to a MPEG decoder, set “MPEG” to  
“Bit Stream” in “Digital Audio Setting”. (See page  
93.)  
Connecting to an MD deck or DAT deck  
• The audio source recorded in Dolby Digital Multi-  
channel surround format cannot be recorded using  
an MD or DAT deck as a digital sound.  
• If not connected to a Dolby Digital decoder, set  
“Dolby Digital” to “PCM” in “Digital Audio Setting”  
(see page 93). Playing back a DVD using incorrect  
settings may generate noise distortion, and damage  
speakers.  
• Set “Dolby Digital” and “MPEG” to “PCM” and set  
“DTS” to “Off” in “Digital Audio Setting” (see pages  
93 and 94) for connecting to an MD or DAT deck.  
• You can use AUDIO OUT jacks for the connection of  
your audio system.  
After You Have Completed  
Connections  
Switch the input selector on your TV to an appropriate  
external input channel. For details, refer to the  
Owner’s Manual of your TV.  
Note  
• Connect this unit directly to the TV. If the AV cables  
are connected to a VCR, pictures may be distorted  
due to the effects of the copy protection system.  
EN  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 26 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Basic Setup  
5 Use [Cursor U / D / L / P] to set  
current time then press [ENTER].  
For the First Time Use  
Right after the purchase of the unit, do the Initialise  
Setting by doing the following procedures.  
This menu may not appear if you have already turned  
on the unit.  
Clock Setting  
--/--/--(---) --:--  
Clock Setting  
01 / 01 / 2007 (Mon) 19 : 34  
1 After making all the necessary  
connections, turn on the TV. Select  
the appropriate external input  
channel. (See pages 23 to 24.)  
2 Press [ ON / STANDBY].  
After displaying the opening picture for 3 seconds,  
the OSD Language Menu will appear.  
Refer to “OSD Language Setting” on page 27 to  
select a language for the on-screen displays and  
the menus, “Channel Setting” on page 27 to setup  
the channels, and “Setting the Clock” on page 30  
to set the clock.  
If you press [PLAY P] at this point, “English” will  
be selected automatically and step 3 can be  
skipped.  
3 Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
OSD Language  
English  
Français  
Español  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Svenska  
Nederlands  
4 Press [ENTER] to start Auto Channel  
Tuning.  
Start Auto-tuning  
OK  
If you like to skip this step, press [RETURN].  
EN  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 27 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
OSD Language Setting  
Follow the steps below to change the OSD Language.  
Channel Setting  
Auto Tuning  
If you have already set the channels when you first  
turned on the unit, you can skip this section.  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
After resetting the settings or whenever you move to a  
new area, we recommend you to programme available  
channels in your area with the following procedures.  
2 Select “Initial Setting” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Disc Management  
Editing  
Setup Menu will appear.  
Dubbing  
2 Select “Initial Setting” using  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Display  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
3 Select “OSD Language” using  
Recording  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Display  
Initial Setting  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
OSD Language  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
3 Select “Channel Setting” using  
Select Video  
Video Out  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Initial Setting  
OSD Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
Select Video  
Video Out  
4 Select the desired language using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Initial Setting  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
OSD Language  
Clock Setting  
English  
Français  
Español  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
4 Select “Auto Tuning” using  
Select Video  
Video Out  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Svenska  
Nederlands  
Initial Setting  
OSD Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
Auto Tuning  
Manual Tuning  
Move  
Select Video  
Video Out  
The selected language will be checked and  
activated.  
5 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
The unit will start storing channels available in  
your area.  
EN  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 28 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
3 Select “Channel Setting” using  
Auto Tuning  
--/--/--(---)  
--:--  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Initial Setting  
OSD Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Auto Tuning Now  
Wait for a moment.  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
Select Video  
Video Out  
• Wait for several minutes to finish channel  
storing.  
After Auto Tuning has stopped:  
4 Select “Manual Tuning” using  
• Use [PROG.  
change the channel.  
• When you use [the Number Buttons], press [0]  
/
] or [the Number Buttons] to  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
first for a single digit number.  
Initial Setting  
OSD Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
• Use [INPUT SELECT  
] or [PROG.  
/
] to  
select an external input channel (“AV1”, “AV2” or  
“AV3”) of this unit.  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
Auto Tuning  
Manual Tuning  
Move  
To cancel auto tuning:  
Press [RETURN] during scanning.  
Select Video  
Video Out  
Note  
• The selection will be affected by how you receive TV  
channels in your local area.  
• If the auto tuning is cancelled during scanning,  
some channels not yet tuned may not be received.  
• You cannot change the channel when either HDD,  
DVD or VCR is in any recording mode (normal  
recording, One-touch Timer Recording or Timer  
Recording).  
5 Select the position number of which  
you want to change the setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Manual Tuning  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Manual Tuning  
You can tune each channel and set their properties  
manually.  
Pos.  
Channel  
Decoder  
Skip  
Station  
P01  
P02  
P03  
P04  
P05  
P06  
P07  
P08  
21  
45  
63  
80  
88  
95  
110  
2
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
ARD  
---  
---  
---  
---  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
---  
---  
Setup Menu will appear.  
---  
2 Select “Initial Setting” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
You can select position numbers 01 to 99.  
You can jump to the next or the previous page  
using [SKIP F] or [SKIP B].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
6 Press [Cursor U / D] to start  
Editing  
Dubbing  
searching for the available channel.  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
• Search direction can be switched by pressing  
[Cursor U / D].  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
• If you already know the channel number, you  
can directly enter the channel number using  
[the Number buttons]. Refer to the following  
Channel Plan table and press the three digits to  
select the channel number.  
Recording  
Display  
(To select channel 4, press [0] first and then  
press [0] and [4]. Or press [4]. And when “4”  
appears, wait for 2 seconds.)  
• If this is the channel you want, press  
[Cursor P].  
EN  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 29 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Channel Plan  
Move  
You can replace two channels.  
CH Indication  
02 – 12  
TV Channel  
E2 – E12  
21 – 69  
E21 – E69  
74 – 78  
X, Y, Z, Z+1, Z+2  
S1 – S20,GAP  
S21 – S41  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
80 – 99,100  
121 – 141  
142 – 153  
Setup Menu will appear.  
R1 – R12  
2 Select “Initial Setting” using  
This unit can receive the Hyper and Oscar  
frequency bands.  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
7 Move to the Decoder Setting section  
using [Cursor P], and change the  
setting using [Cursor U / D].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
• If you select “On”, Scrambled image will be  
decoded when connected to a decoder.  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
8 Move to the Skip Setting section  
using [Cursor P]. If the setting is  
“On”, change it to “Off” using  
[Cursor U / D].  
Recording  
Display  
• If you select “On”, the channel will be skipped  
when you change channels using  
3 Select “Channel Setting” using  
[PROG.  
/
].  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
9 When the setup for the position is  
completed, press [ENTER].  
Initial Setting  
OSD Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
To set another channel, repeat steps 5 to 9.  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
10 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Select Video  
Video Out  
• “Station” (station name) will be detected and  
assigned automatically. It cannot be selected.  
To Select a Channel  
Notes on using [the Number buttons]:  
• Enter channel numbers as a two-digit number for  
the quickest result. For example, to select channel  
6, press [0] and [6]. If you only press [6], channel 6  
will be selected after 2 seconds. You can only select  
channels 1 to 99.  
4 Select “Move” using [Cursor U / D],  
then press [ENTER].  
Initial Setting  
OSD Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
About an external input:  
• You can select the external input mode “AV1”, “AV2”  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
Auto Tuning  
Manual Tuning  
Move  
or “AV3” using [INPUT SELECT  
[PROG. ].  
] or  
Select Video  
Video Out  
/
• You cannot change the channel when either HDD,  
DVD or VCR is in any recording mode (normal  
recording, One-touch Timer Recording or Timer  
Recording).  
EN  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 30 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
5 Select the line of the channel you  
want to move to a new position  
using [Cursor U / D], then press  
[ENTER].  
Setting the Clock  
Auto Clock Setting  
Move  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
Pos.  
Channel  
Decoder  
Skip  
Station  
P01  
P02  
P03  
P04  
P05  
P06  
P07  
P08  
21  
45  
63  
80  
88  
95  
110  
2
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
ARD  
---  
2 Select “Initial Setting” using  
---  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
---  
---  
---  
---  
--/--/--(---) --:--  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
---  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
• The indication on the selected line turns red.  
• You can jump to the next or the previous page  
using [SKIP F] or [SKIP B].  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
6 Go to a desired position using  
Display  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
• The selected channel is now moved.  
To move another channel, repeat steps 5 to 6.  
3 Select “Clock Setting” using  
7 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
--/--/--(---) --:--  
Initial Setting  
OSD Language  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
Select Video  
Video Out  
4 Select “Auto Clock Setting” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
--/--/--(---) --:--  
Initial Setting  
OSD Language  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Select Video  
Video Out  
EN  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 31 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
5 Select “On” using [Cursor U / D],  
Manual Clock Setting  
then press [ENTER].  
1 Follow the steps 1 to 3 in “Auto  
--/--/--(---) --:--  
Initial Setting  
Clock Setting” on page 30.  
OSD Language  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
2 Select “Clock Setting” using  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Select Vide
Video Out  
On  
Off  
--/--/--(---) --:--  
Initial Setting  
OSD Language  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Select Video  
Video Out  
6 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
7 Press [ ON / STANDBY] to turn the  
unit to standby mode.  
The Auto Clock function is activated.  
3 Move to the item you want to set  
using [Cursor L / P], and change the  
setting to suit your preference using  
[Cursor U / D].  
This unit will search for the time only when the  
unit is in standby mode. Leave the unit for several  
minutes to give it time to set the clock.  
Note  
• If you want to cancel “Auto Clock Setting”, select  
“Off” using [Cursor U / D] at step 5, and then press  
[ENTER].  
Clock Setting  
--/--/--(---) --:--  
• The default setting of “Auto Clock Setting” is “On”.  
• The clock may set itself automatically after you  
connect the antenna cable to the unit and plug in the  
mains cable. In this case, the current time will  
appear on the front panel display.  
Clock Setting  
-- ---- (--) --  
--  
/
/
:
--  
To set the clock automatically, the channel assigned  
to “P01” must receive the PDC signal and the  
Decoder must be Off.  
• The clock cannot be set automatically if you are not  
receiving a channel in your area that carries a time  
signal. In this case, set the clock manually.  
• Once the auto clock setting is performed, the unit  
will correct the current time by receiving PDC  
broadcasts whenever the unit is in standby mode.  
• The unit will correct the current time automatically at  
8:00, if the unit is in standby mode.  
4 When all the information is entered,  
press [ENTER].  
Your setting is now activated.  
Although seconds are not displayed, they will be  
counted from zero.  
5 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
• From 23:00 to 1:00, the Auto Clock function will not  
operate even if the unit is in standby mode.  
Your clock setting will be lost if either there is a  
power failure or this unit has been unplugged for  
more than 30 seconds.  
EN  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 32 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Selecting the Sound Mode  
Selecting the TV Aspect Ratio  
You can select the TV aspect ratio to match the  
formats of what you are playing back on the unit and  
your TV screen (4:3 standard or 16:9 widescreen TV).  
This unit can receive bilingual broadcasts.  
You can switch between modes by pressing  
[AUDIO  
] on the remote control. Each mode is  
indicated on the TV screen as follows.  
• During reception of bilingual broadcasts  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Display on  
the TV  
Setup Menu will appear.  
Mode  
Audio output  
screen  
2 Select “Initial Setting” using  
Main audio from both  
speakers  
Main  
Sub  
Main  
Sub  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Sub audio from both  
speakers  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
• Main audio from the left  
speaker  
• Sub audio from the right  
speaker  
Main / Sub  
Main/Sub  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Display  
3 Select “TV Aspect” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Initial Setting  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
OSD Language  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
Select Video  
Video Out  
4 Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Initial Setting  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
OSD Language  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
4:3 Pan & Scan  
16:9 Wide  
16:9 Shrink  
Select Video  
Video Out  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
• The default setting is “4:3 Letter Box”.  
5 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
EN  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 33 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Refer to the table below to find the appropriate setting for your TV.  
Your Setting  
4:3 Pan & Scan 4:3 Letter Box  
The aspect ratio of  
the original image  
Your TV  
16:9 Shrink  
16:9 Wide  
4:3  
16:9  
*1, *2  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*5  
*5  
*8  
4:3  
*4  
*5  
*8  
*5  
*6  
*9  
*5  
*7  
16:9  
16:9  
4:3  
*10  
*1 The aspect ratio of the image will not be distorted and no parts will be cropped, but black bars will appear on  
both sides.  
*2 Select this option only when you cannot change the ratio on your TV.  
*3 The image will be stretched horizontally to fit 16:9 TV screen.  
*4 This setting is designed to view the 4:3 image on 16:9 TV. If you have 4:3 TV and select this setting, black bars  
will appear on both sides and the image will be squeezed horizontally.  
*5 No effect.  
*6 This setting is for 4:3 TV. If you have 16:9 TV and select this setting, the aspect ratio of the image will be  
distorted and parts of the image will be cropped.  
*7 This setting is for 4:3 TV. If you have 16:9 TV and select this setting, black bars will appear on the top and  
bottom of the screen and the image will be squeezed vertically.  
*8 The image will be squeezed horizontally to fit the 4:3 TV screen.  
*9 The aspect ratio of the image will not be distorted but the both sides will be cropped to fit the 4:3 TV screen.  
*10 The aspect ratio of the image will not be distorted and no parts will be cropped, but black bars will appear on  
the top and bottom of the screen.  
EN  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 34 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Recording  
Information on Supported Media  
Media Types  
You want to  
HDD DVD-RW VR DVD-RW Video DVD-R DVD+RW DVD+R VCR  
Record TV programmes  
{
{
{
{
[
[
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
[
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
[
{
{
{
{
{
{
[
{
[
{
Reuse by deleting unwanted contents  
Edits recorded contents  
*2  
Edit/Record from connected equipment  
Copy disc for distribution  
*1  
*1  
Play on other HDD/DVD/VCR equipment  
*1 VR mode DVD-RW can only be played on DVD equipment that is VR compatible.  
*2 Programmes can be recorded from other equipment, but they cannot be edited.  
Features  
HDD DVD-RW VR DVD-RW Video DVD-R DVD+RW DVD+R VCR  
Recording  
Rewritable  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Can create chapters at fixed intervals (auto.)  
Can create chapters wherever you like  
(manual)  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Can record 16:9 size pictures  
Can record copy-once programmes  
Editing  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
*1  
Yes  
Can perform basic edit functions  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Can perform advanced edit functions  
(Playlist edit)  
*1 CPRM compatible disc only.  
Note  
• For details of the above functions and implied restrictions, see the explanations inside this Owner’s Manual.  
Information:  
This unit can record on DVD-RW / R discs and  
DVD+RW / R discs.  
+VR mode is a recording format for DVD+RW / R. You  
can play back in this format on most of the DVD  
player.  
DVD-R / +R discs allow you to record programmes  
only once, and the recorded contents can be erased  
although the space left on the disc does not change.  
DVD-RW / +RW discs allow you to record  
programmes repeatedly, and the recorded contents  
can be erased.  
There are 3 recording formats: VR mode, Video mode  
and +VR mode. VR and Video modes are available  
for DVD-RW discs while as only Video mode is  
available for DVD-R discs. +VR mode is available for  
DVD+RW / R discs.  
Logo  
Attributes  
8 cm / 12 cm, single-sided,  
single layer disc  
Max. recording time  
(SLP mode, approx.):  
480 minutes (4.7 GB)  
(for 12 cm)  
144 minutes (1.4 GB)  
(for 8 cm)  
Video mode is the same recording format as used on  
the pre-recorded DVD-Videos you purchase in local  
shops. You can play back the discs recorded in this  
format on most of the DVD players. You will need to  
finalise such discs (see page 57) before playing them  
back on other DVD players. Unless finalised, you can  
record additional materials or edit discs recorded in  
Video mode with this unit.  
VR (Video Recording) mode is a basic recording  
format for DVD-RW discs.  
You can record and edit material repeatedly. It is  
impossible to record additional materials on a disc  
formatted in VR mode and already recorded in  
another video system other than PAL, such as NTSC.  
8 cm / 12 cm, single-sided,  
single layer disc  
Approx. max. recording time  
(EP mode):  
327 minutes (4.7 GB)  
(for 12 cm)  
108 minutes (1.4 GB)  
(for 8 cm)  
EN  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 35 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
If you want to record repeatedly on the same disc, or  
if you want to edit the disc after recording, use a  
rewritable DVD-RW / +RW type disc.  
If you want to save recordings without any alteration,  
use a non-rewritable DVD-R / +R type disc.  
Rec Mode  
You can select a Rec Mode among 5 options in  
DVD-RW / R, 4 options in DVD+RW / R. And the  
recordable time and the picture / audio quality of  
recorded material depends on the Rec Mode you  
select.  
Recordable Discs  
• Discs that can be used with this unit:  
DVD-R: 2x, 4x, 8x or 16x  
DVD-RW: 2x or 4x  
DVD+R: 1x-16x  
Rec  
Mode  
Recording Video / Sound  
Disc size  
time  
Quality  
✬✬✬✬✬  
✬✬✬✬  
✬✬✬  
✬✬  
XP  
SP  
LP  
18 min  
(good)  
36 min  
72 min  
DVD+RW: 1x-4x  
8 cm Disc  
• We strongly recommend for good recording quality:  
TDK DVD+R 4x/8x/16x, SONY DVD+R 4x/8x/16x,  
MAXELL DVD+R 4x/8x/16x, SONY DVD+RW 4x  
• Discs that have been tested and are proven to be  
compatible with this unit:  
MAXELL DVD-R, TDK DVD-RW 2x,  
VERBATIM DVD-R 8x, JVC DVD-RW 4x  
VERBATIM DVD+R 8x  
EP  
SLP  
108 min  
144 min  
(poor)  
(good)  
(except +VR mode discs)  
XP  
SP  
60 min  
120 min  
240 min  
360 min  
480 min  
✬✬✬✬✬  
✬✬✬✬  
✬✬✬  
✬✬  
12 cm Disc LP  
EP  
VERBATIM DVD+RW 4x  
• Although DVD+RW / R discs are playable on other  
units without finalisation in most cases, it is  
recommended to finalise in order to stabilise the  
performance.  
SLP  
(poor)  
(good)  
(except +VR mode discs)  
XP  
SP  
LP  
34 hrs  
68 hrs  
✬✬✬✬✬  
✬✬✬✬  
✬✬✬  
✬✬  
HDD  
(Internal)  
Disc type  
Disc format  
Functions  
136 hrs  
204 hrs  
272 hrs  
EP  
SLP  
Video mode  
Video  
Playing back,  
Limited recording,  
Limited editing  
(poor)  
DVD-RW  
To select the Rec Mode you prefer, press  
[REC MODE]. The information of the selected media  
(internal HDD or DVD) will be displayed.  
VR mode  
VR  
Playing back,  
Recording, Original /  
Playlist editing  
DVD-RW  
DVD  
SP  
HDD  
Video mode  
Playing back,  
Limited recording,  
Limited editing  
DVD-R  
+VR mode  
Playing back,  
Limited recording,  
Limited editing  
Press [REC MODE] repeatedly to change the Rec  
Mode. The speed will be changed each time you  
press it with the following order:  
DVD+RW  
XP  
SP  
LP  
+VR mode  
Playing back,  
Limited recording,  
Limited editing  
DVD+R  
SLP  
EP  
SLP mode is not available for +VR mode discs.  
If DVD+RW / R were used for the Timer Programming  
with SLP mode, the Rec Mode will change to EP  
mode.  
DVD players bearing the  
logo are capable  
of playing back DVD-RW discs recorded in VR  
mode.  
* The recording time is an estimate and actual  
recording time may differ.  
* Audio and video quality of the content being  
recorded may degrade if the recording time  
becomes longer.  
* If you press [DISPLAY], remaining recording time is  
displayed when the unit is in stop mode.  
EN  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 36 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Note  
Information on Copy Control  
• This unit cannot record on CD-RW or CD-R discs.  
• DVD-RW / R discs, DVD+RW / R discs and  
CD-RW / R discs recorded on a personal computer  
or a DVD or CD recorder may not be played back if  
the disc is damaged or dirty or if there is  
Some satellite broadcasts include copy-protected  
information. If you wish to record them, refer to the  
following.  
Copy- Copy- Copy-  
Disc type / format  
free  
once prohibited  
condensation on the unit’s lens.  
• If you record on a disc using a personal computer,  
there are cases in which it may not be played back  
because of the settings of the application software  
used to create the disc, even if it is recorded in a  
compatible format. (Check with the software  
publisher for more detailed information.)  
• Discs recorded in Video mode on this unit cannot  
record additionally using other DVD recorders.  
• Since the recording is made by the variable bit rate  
(VBR) method, the actual remaining time for  
recording may be a little bit shorter than the  
remaining time displayed on the OSD, depending on  
the picture you are recording.  
• DVD-RW once formatted with other DVD recorders  
cannot be recorded on this unit and vice versa.  
• The maximum Fast Dubbing speed is up to 4x for  
DVD-RW discs and DVD-R discs.  
• During Fast Dubbing, the noise from the unit  
becomes louder. This is not a malfunction.  
HDD  
VR  
ver. 1.1 / ver. 1.2  
DVD-RW  
ver. 1.1 / ver. 1.2 CPRM compatible  
ver. 1.1 / ver. 1.2  
Video  
DVD-RW  
ver. 1.1 / ver. 1.2 CPRM compatible  
ver. 2.0  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
VCR  
: Recordable  
: Not recordable  
Making Discs Playable in Other DVD  
Players (Finalise)  
Restrictions on Recording  
You cannot record copy-protected video or a  
programme broadcasted in the NTSC colour system  
using this unit. Copy-protected video includes DVD-  
Videos and some satellite broadcasts.  
After recording, you must finalise the disc to play it  
back on other players. (See page 57.)  
You cannot finalise discs in other DVD recorders.  
If copy-protected material or NTSC signal is detected,  
recording will pause or stop automatically and an  
error message appears on the screen.  
You can only record “Copy-once only” video using a  
DVD-RW disc in VR mode with Content Protection for  
Recordable Media (CPRM).  
• For Video mode discs, the finalisation is required.  
• For VR mode discs, the finalisation is  
recommended.  
• For +VR mode discs, the finalisation is  
recommended.  
• For the information on videotapes, refer to “VCR  
Functions” on pages 100 to 102.  
When recording a TV broadcast or an external input,  
you can display copy control information on the screen.  
CPRM is a scrambling copy protection system for the  
protection of “copy-once” broadcast programmes.  
This unit is CPRM compatible, which means that you  
can record copy-once broadcast programmes, but  
you cannot make a copy of those recordings. CPRM  
recordings can only be played back on DVD players  
that are specifically compatible with CPRM.  
Maximum recordable numbers of title / chapters:  
HDD:  
600 titles per each Playlist and  
Original  
99 chapters per title  
99 titles per each Playlist and  
Original  
VR mode DVD:  
999 chapters per each Playlist  
and Original  
Video mode DVD: 99 titles per disc  
99 chapters per title  
+VR mode DVD: 49 titles per discs  
254 chapters per disc  
99 chapters per title  
Note  
• Remaining time of +VR mode disc may decrease  
when adding chapter marks or increase when  
clearing chapter marks depending on the recording  
time or edited contents.  
• For +VR mode disc, it is not likely to be able to add  
chapter marks up to the maximum recordable  
numbers of chapters, according to time and number  
of chapters.  
EN  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 37 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
About HDD  
HDD is a special device which has high recording  
density and is suited for long-time recording or high-  
speed cueing but by contrast, has many factors which  
can cause breakage. Use HDD on the premise that  
you should dub the recorded programmes to a DVD  
disc or a videotape to protect your previous videos.  
HDD is a temporary storage location:  
HDD is not a permanent storage location of the  
recorded contents. Be sure to use it as a temporary  
storage location until you watch the programmes  
once, edit them, or dub them to a DVD disc or a  
videotape.  
Be sure to dub (back up) data promptly if you find  
abnormalities in HDD:  
If there is mechanical trouble with the HDD, grinding  
or other sounds may be heard or blocky noise may  
appear on the image. If you continue to use as it is,  
deterioration may continue and eventually the HDD  
may not be used at all. If you notice these symptoms  
of a failing HDD, promptly dub the data to a DVD disc  
or a videotape.  
When an HDD fails, recovery of recorded content  
(data) may be impossible.  
About the remaining capacity of HDD recording time:  
In recording to HDD, the Remaining Capacity Display  
may differ from the actual recordable time as this unit  
adopts Variable Bit Rate encoding, which varies the  
recording (storage) amount of data in conformity with  
the information amount of video. Before recording to  
the HDD, ensure there is sufficient space on the HDD  
by deleting unnecessary titles in advance. (Remaining  
capacity will not increase if you only delete Playlists.)  
EN  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 38 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
4 Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Formatting a Disc  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Auto Format  
Whenever you load a brand new DVD-RW and  
VR Mode  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
Video Mode  
+VR Mode  
DVD+RW disc, the unit will ask you to format the disc.  
1 Select the recording format you  
prefer using [Cursor L / P]. Then  
press [ENTER] to format the disc.  
• Brand new DVD-R disc is formatted in Video  
mode and brand new DVD+R is formatted in  
+VR mode. But limited to the brand new DVD-R  
disc only, you can re-format the disc. Refer to  
“Reformatting a Disc (Disc Format)” below.  
• The default setting is “VR Mode”.  
5 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Note  
• You cannot mix two formats on one DVD-RW disc.  
When you load a disc once recorded before, the  
recording format cannot be changed even if you  
change it in the Setup Menu.  
VR Mode  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
Video Mode  
Formatting the disc in VR Mode.  
OK to proceed?  
No  
Yes  
Reformatting a Disc (Disc Format)  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD+RW  
If you format a pre-recorded DVD-RW / +RW disc, all  
the data contained in it will be erased and the disc will  
return to the blank media status. This feature is only  
available for the DVD-RW / +RW disc.  
Formatting will start.  
Example: VR Format  
• The screen returns to normal after formatting is  
completed.  
• This operation may take awhile to be completed.  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
Note  
2 Select “Disc Management” using  
• When you reformat the DVD-RW / +RW disc, all  
contents of the disc will be erased.  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
• A disc once formatted with this unit cannot be used  
on other DVD recorders unless finalised.  
• Depending on discs, the available format will vary.  
DVD-RW: VR mode, Video mode  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
DVD+RW: +VR mode  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Display  
3 Select “DVD Format” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
EN  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 39 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Part Erase:  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P], then press  
[ENTER].  
Deleting All Contents in HDD  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initia
All Erase  
Part Erse  
Delete the contents of the HDD.  
Protected titles will not be deleted.  
OK to proceed?  
2 Select “Disc Management” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
No  
Yes  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
The protected contents in HDD will not be  
deleted.  
• The default setting is “No”.  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Display  
Creating Chapter Marks  
Automatically  
3 Select “HDD Initialise” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
HDD  
You can sort out the recording by adding chapter  
marks every set time interval.  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Recording” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Editing  
Dubbing  
4 Select a setting using [Cursor U/ D],  
then press [ENTER].  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
• The default setting is “All Erase”.  
Recording  
Display  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
All Erase  
Part Erase  
3 Select “Auto Chapter [HDD]” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Recording  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Auto Chapter [HDD]  
Noise Reduction  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
Fast Dubbing Audio (Video Mode)  
External Input Audio  
Recording Audio Select [XP]  
Initialise  
All Erase:  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P], then press  
[ENTER].  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
All Erase  
Part Erase  
Delete the contents of the HDD.  
Protected titles will also be deleted.  
OK to proceed?  
No  
Yes  
All contents in HDD will be deleted.  
• The default setting is “No”.  
EN  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 40 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
4 Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Setting Bilingual Recording  
Recording  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Audio  
Auto Chapter [HDD]  
Noise Reduction  
5
minutes  
Video  
DVD-RW  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
60 minutes  
Off  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
Fast Dubbing Audio (Video Mode)  
External Input Audio  
Recording Audio Select [XP]  
Initialise  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
You can select either “Main” or “Sub” audio to record a  
bilingual broadcast in Video mode and +VR mode.  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Recording” using  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
• The default setting is “15 minutes”.  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
5 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
• Depending the recording time, a chapter with no  
image may be created at the end.  
• Chapter marks will automatically be added at the set  
interval with “Auto Chapter [HDD]”. (Chapter marks  
will not be added while recording is paused.) To add  
chapter marks manually, refer to “Adding or Deleting  
Chapter Marks Manually” on page 78.  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Display  
3 Select “Bilingual Recording Audio”  
using [Cursor U / D], then press  
[ENTER].  
4 Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Recording  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Auto Chapter [HDD]  
Noise Reduction  
Main  
Sub  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
Fast Dubbing Audio (Video Mode)  
External Input Audio  
Recording Audio Select [XP]  
Initialise  
• Main : Main audio  
• Sub : Sub audio  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
• The default setting is “Main”.  
5 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
• If you are recording onto a VR mode disc, both  
“Main” and “Sub” will be recorded regardless of your  
setting here. And when you play back, you can  
choose either audio format or a combination of both  
as your playback audio.  
• If you are recording the bilingual programme onto  
the HDD with “Fast Dubbing Audio (Video Mode)”  
set to “On”, the recording will be made in whichever  
the audio format type you choose here.  
• Make sure to set the audio format as mentioned  
above when you record on the HDD or a VR mode  
DVD-RW disc while “Recording Audio Select [XP]”  
is set to “LPCM”.  
EN  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 41 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Note  
• “LPCM” stands for Linear Pulse Code Modulation. It  
changes analogue sound to digital sound without  
compressing audio data.  
• When the recording mode is set at other than XP,  
the unit records “Dolby Digital” audio automatically  
even if you selected “LPCM”.  
Recording Audio Select (XP)  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
You can enjoy high quality sound recording. This  
function works only when the recording mode is set at  
XP.  
• With HDD or VR mode DVD-RW discs, you cannot  
record both main and sub audio together when  
“LPCM” is selected. Instead, whichever the type of  
audio selected in “Bilingual Recording Audio” will be  
recorded. (See “Setting Bilingual Recording Audio”  
on page 40.)  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Recording” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Display  
3 Select “Recording Audio Select  
[XP]” using [Cursor U / D], then  
press [ENTER].  
4 Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Recording  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Auto Chapter [HDD]  
Noise Reduction  
Dolby Digital  
LPCM  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
Fast Dubbing Audio (Video Mode)  
External Input Audio  
Recording Audio Select [XP]  
Initialise  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
• The default setting is “Dolby Digital”.  
Dolby Digital:  
Records Dolby Digital audio for good quality  
sound.  
LPCM:  
Records Linear PCM audio for the best quality  
sound.  
5 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
EN  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 42 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Basic Recording  
VR  
One-touch Timer Recording  
(OTR)  
Video  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
Follow the steps below to record a TV programme.  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
This is a simple way to start a Timer Recording. You  
can start recording right away by just one touch of a  
button and each press of the button sets the end time  
for the recording. The recording time will increase by  
15 minute to the max of 4 hours.  
• Use only the HDD or CPRM-compatible VR mode  
DVD-RW discs for recording copy-once  
programmes. (See page 36.)  
If you are recording to the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you are recording to a disc, press [DVD] first.  
Insert a recordable disc if you are recording to a  
DVD.  
If you are recording to the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you are recording to a disc, press [DVD] first.  
1 Whenever you want to start  
recording the programme you are  
watching, press [REC I].  
The recording will start.  
1 Turn on the TV. Select the  
appropriate external input channel.  
(See pages 23 to 24.)  
2 Select a Rec Mode using  
2 Press [REC I] repeatedly to set the  
end time for the recording. Each  
press of the button will increase the  
recording time by 15 minutes (the  
maximum recording time is 4 hours).  
[REC MODE]. (See page 35.)  
3 Select the desired channel to record  
using [PROG.  
/
] or  
[the Number buttons].  
4 Press [REC I] to start recording.  
0:15  
The information will be displayed for 5 seconds.  
To pause the recording, press [PAUSE p].  
Press [REC I] or [PAUSE p] to resume the  
recording.  
0:30  
(Normal Recording)  
5 Press [STOP S] to stop the  
4:00  
3:45  
recording.  
• The maximum recording time is 4 hours.  
To change the recording time during  
the One-touch Timer Recording, press  
[REC I] repeatedly.  
Note  
• If playback and recording are in progress at the  
same time, select the appropriate device by  
pressing [HDD] or [DVD] before you press  
[PAUSE p] or [STOP S] to pause or stop the  
operation.  
• When the Clock Setting has not been made, the  
date and time of title names will be 01/01/07(Mon)  
and 0:00.  
• Up to 600 titles can be recorded on the HDD.  
• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on the DVD-RW / R  
discs.  
• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on the DVD+RW / R  
discs.  
• You cannot change the recording mode during HDD/  
DVD recording.  
• If you want to monitor the programme that you are  
recording, make sure the device such as a Satellite  
Box is powered off or press [DISPLAY] when it is  
connected to AV2.  
3 When the recording is completed,  
the unit will ask you whether to turn  
off the unit except conditions listed  
below.  
- If a Timer Recording is programmed to start in 5  
minutes.  
- During playback of HDD / DVD / VCR.  
- During recording of HDD / DVD / VCR.  
- While displaying menus or information on the  
screen.  
• The unit will be turned off automatically if you  
select “Yes” or if you do not reply in 1 minute.  
To cancel the OTR in progress, press  
[STOP S].  
• NTSC recording is prohibited in this unit.  
• You can play back a title on one device while making  
a recording on other device. To do so, simply select  
the device (HDD, DVD or VCR) you like to use for  
the playback by pressing [HDD], [DVD] or [VCR]  
button during HDD / DVD / VCR recording. And then  
follow the normal playback procedure.  
Note  
• The remaining recording time will be displayed on  
the Front Panel Display during a One-touch Timer  
Recording.  
• The unit will turn off automatically when a power  
failure occurs.  
EN  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 43 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
• If you want to monitor the programme that you are  
recording, make sure the device such as a Satellite  
Box is powered off or press [DISPLAY] when it is  
connected to AV2.  
Timer Recording  
VR  
Video  
• If you have not set the clock, you cannot switch to  
OTR. Set the clock in “Setting the Clock” on page 30  
before One-touch Timer Recording.  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
• When the DVD disc space is full during the One-  
touch Timer Recording, the Timer Recording stops  
and the unit turns off.  
You can programme the unit to record up to 32  
programmes within a month in advance. Daily or  
weekly recordings are available.  
• You cannot pause OTR.  
Preparing for Timer Recording:  
• Be sure to set the clock before programming a  
Timer Recording. Refer to “Setting the Clock” on  
page 30.  
• Check that the recording media (internal HDD or  
DVD) has enough recordable space for the time  
you set.  
• Insert a recordable disc if you are recording to a  
DVD.  
• Use only the HDD or CPRM-compatible VR  
mode DVD-RW discs for recording copy-once  
programmes. (See page 36.)  
1 Press [TIMER PROG.].  
Timer Programme List will appear.  
Timer Programme  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Station ---  
HDD Remain 72:00(SP)
Page 1/4  
Date  
Skip CH  
Start  
End  
Mode  
VPS/PDC  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
You can access this screen from the Setup  
Menu also.  
2 Select a line which is not yet set  
using [Cursor U / D], then press  
[ENTER].  
Timer Programme  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Station ---  
5
6
7
HDD Remain 72:00(SP)
Page 1/4  
1
Date  
Skip CH  
Start  
End  
Mode  
VPS/PDC  
8
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
P01  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
-- --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
2
3
4
1
2
Available recording time left on the  
recording media under the programmed Rec  
Mode.  
Recording Channel:  
To record from an external input, select “AV1”,  
“AV2” or “AV3”. (Using camcorder or other  
source.)  
EN  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 44 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
• If you press [  
ON / STANDBY] to turn the  
3
Recording Date:  
unit to standby mode, it will turn on 2 minutes  
before the programmed recording time, and  
start recording at the programmed recording  
time. When the recording is completed, the unit  
will ask you whether to turn off the unit.  
The unit will be turned off automatically if you  
select “Yes” or if you do not reply in 1 minute.  
To stop recording in progress, press [STOP S].  
Confirmation message will appear. Select “Yes”  
using [Cursor L / P].  
When press [Cursor D] at the current date, the  
setting will change as follows.  
e.g., 1st January  
01/01  
Daily  
M-F  
W-Sat  
W-Fri  
Relay Recording:  
Weekly recording  
When you Timer Record to DVD, the unit  
automatically changes the recording media to  
HDD under the conditions listed below:  
- when there is no recordable disc in the unit.  
- when the disc does not have enough space for  
the recording.  
- if the unit is formatting or finalising a disc.  
This feature is available only for Timer Recording  
but not for OTR.  
W-Sun  
31/01  
Skip:  
Select this item only when you want to deactivate  
the periodical (Daily, Mon-Fri or Weekly) Timer  
Recording temporarily. To do so, move the cursor  
to the Skip section and then press  
[Cursor U / D].  
Check mark will appear and press [ENTER] to  
activate the setting.  
Start Time:  
End Time:  
Rec Mode:  
Refer to “Rec Mode” on page 35.  
Recording Media (HDD or DVD):  
To record onto the HDD, select “HDD”. To record  
onto a disc, select “DVD”. VCR is not compatible  
with Timer Recording.  
Note  
• If you have not set the clock, the clock setting  
window will appear instead of Timer Programme List  
at step 1. Continue from step 3 in “Setting the Clock”  
on page 30 before programming the timer.  
• If a basic recording or One-touch Timer Recording is  
in progress on the VCR and the Timer Recording set  
for HDD or DVD is about to begin, the unit will  
automatically switch to the programmed channel  
within 15 seconds before the programmed time, and  
the recording in progress on the VCR will be  
cancelled UNLESS their recording channel is the  
same. If their recording channel is the same, the  
Timer Recording for HDD or DVD will start without  
cancelling the recording currently in progress on the  
VCR. In this case, the recording of the same  
channel will be made on both VCR and the HDD or  
DVD.  
• The maximum recordable duration is 7 hours for  
Video mode discs, 8.5 hours for VR mode discs and  
5 hours for +VR mode discs.  
• If the recording time exceeds 12 hours, a Timer  
Recording cannot be set.  
• If the starting time you entered is already in the past,  
the recording will start as soon as you activate the  
Timer Recording by pressing [ENTER] at step 4.  
• If playback and recording are in progress at the  
same time, select the appropriate device by  
pressing [HDD], [DVD] or [VCR] before you press  
[PAUSE p] or [STOP S] to pause or stop the  
operation.  
4
5
6
7
8
VPS/PDC system:  
Refer to “VPS (Video Programme System) / PDC  
(Programme Delivery Control)” on page 45.  
• VPS/PDC system is only available for HDD.  
• VPS/PDC system is not available for periodical  
timer programme.  
3 Select an item to set using  
[Cursor L / P], and set the contents  
to suit your preference using  
[Cursor U / D].  
4 Press [ENTER] when all the  
information is entered.  
The  
icon will appear on the Front Panel  
Display indicating one or more Timer Recordings  
are in standby.  
• Press [CLEAR] will reset all the entered  
information.  
To set another programme, repeat steps 2 to 4.  
• When programmes are overlapped, a warning  
message “All or part of the programme will not  
be recorded.” will appear.  
• When the Timer Recording is finished, confirmation  
message will appear. If there is no signal for about  
1 minute, unit will turn off automatically.  
• If DVD+RW / R were used for the Timer  
Programming with SLP mode, the Rec Mode will  
change to EP mode.  
• When VPS / PDC is set to “On” for timer recording,  
you may hear some noise from the unit while the unit  
is in timer standby mode. This is not a malfunction.  
- When icon appears, a part of the programme  
will not be recorded.  
- When icon appears, the whole programme  
will be recorded.  
For details on overlapped Timer Programmings,  
refer to “Hints for Timer Recording” on page 45.  
5 Press [TIMER PROG.] to exit.  
• You can also press [SETUP] twice to exit.  
EN  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 45 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Editing the Timer Programming  
Information  
VPS (Video Programme System) /  
PDC (Programme Delivery Control)  
The Video Programme System (VPS) or Programme  
Delivery Control (PDC) assures that the TV  
programmes you have programmed for Timer  
Recording are recorded exactly from beginning to  
end, even if the actual broadcasting time differs from  
the scheduled time due to a delayed start or extension  
of the programme duration. Furthermore, if a  
programme is interrupted, the recording will also be  
interrupted automatically and resumed when the  
programme starts again.  
1 Press [TIMER PROG.].  
Timer Programme List will appear.  
Timer Programme  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Station ---  
HDD Remain 72:00(SP)
Page 1/4  
Date  
Skip CH  
Start  
End  
Mode  
VPS/PDC  
06 (Mon)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
P02  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
22 : 00 23 : 00  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
Off  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
If the VPS / PDC signal drops out because the  
broadcast signal is weak, or if a broadcasting station  
does not transmit a regular VPS / PDC signal, the  
Timer Recording is performed in normal mode  
(without VPS / PDC) even if it was programmed for  
VPS / PDC. If the starting time of the VPS / PDC  
Timer Recording is between 0:00 and 3:59 on a given  
day, the VPS / PDC function will operate from 20:00  
on the previous day to 4:00 on the next day. If the  
starting time of the VPS / PDC Timer Recording is  
between 4:00 and 23:59 on a given day, the VPS /  
PDC function will operate from 0:00 on the given day  
to 4:00 on the next day. This means that if the relevant  
programme is broadcasted within this period, it is  
recorded correctly. If the timer is not programmed  
correctly, the incorrect timer setting stays in effect  
unless you cancel it. To cancel an incorrect timer  
setting, refer to “Editing the Timer Programming  
Information” on this page.  
To change the setting of a programme:  
1 Select the programme you want to edit using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Use [SKIP  
F
]
or [SKIP  
B
]
to jump to next /  
previous Timer Programme List page.  
Timer Programme  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Station ---  
HDD Remain 72:00(SP)
Page 1/4  
Date  
Skip CH  
Start  
End  
Mode  
VPS/PDC  
06 (Mon)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
P01  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
22 : 00 23 : 00  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
Off  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
Hints for Timer Recording  
The priority of overlapped settings:  
When the Timer Programmings are overlapped, you  
will receive a warning message.  
2 Move to the item you want to change using  
[Cursor L / P], then press [Cursor U / D] to  
change the setting.  
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm.  
If this happens, check the Timer Programme List and  
change it as necessary. Otherwise, the unit will  
prioritise recording as described below.  
To delete a programme from the list:  
1 Select the programme you want to delete using  
[Cursor U / D] (Do not press [ENTER]), then  
press [CLEAR].  
2 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P], then press  
[ENTER]. The programme is now deleted.  
If the starting time is same:  
• The Timer Programming set first (PROG. 1) has  
priority.  
PROG. 2  
recording  
PROG. 1  
Timer Programme  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
will start  
after  
PROG. 2  
Station ---  
PROG. 1  
recordingis  
completed.  
HDD Remain 
Page 1/4  
Actual  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
Skip CH  
PS/PDC  
Clear the setting?  
recording  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
-- (---)  
P02  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
SP HDD  
Off  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
No  
Yes  
The first 15 seconds (approx.) will be cut off.  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
-- : --  
Different start time and different end time:  
• A program with the earlier start time has the priority.  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
PROG. 3  
PROG. 3  
2 Press [TIMER PROG.] to exit.  
PROG. 2  
Note  
Actual  
recording  
PROG. 1  
• This unit automatically lists up the programmes in  
the order of start time every time you access the  
Timer Programme List.  
The first 15 seconds (approx.) will be cut off.  
EN  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 46 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
If the recording time entirely overlaps:  
• The shorter Timer Programming (PROG. 2) is not  
recorded.  
Setting External Input Audio  
PROG. 1  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
PROG. 2  
Actual  
recording  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
PROG. 1  
When the external input audio is a bilingual  
broadcast, or when copying a videotape to a DVD  
disc, you can choose “Stereo” or “Bilingual” to record  
on a DVD.  
If the End time of the programme currently being  
recorded and the Start time of the subsequent  
programme are same:  
• If PROG. 1 is a DVD recorded programme, the  
beginning of PROG. 2 may be cut off.  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
PROG. 1  
2 Select “Recording” using  
PROG. 2  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Actual  
recording  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
The last 45 seconds (approx.) will be cut off.  
* The amount of time cut off differs depending on  
the recording media.  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Display  
3 Select “External Input Audio” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
4 Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Recording  
01/01/07(Mon)  
19:34  
Auto Chapter [HDD]  
Noise Reduction  
Stereo  
Bilingual  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
Fast Dubbing Audio (Video Mode)  
External Input Audio  
Recording Audio Select [XP]  
Initialise  
• Stereo : Stereophonic sound  
• Bilingual: Main and Sub audio  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
• The default setting is “Stereo”.  
5 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Hint  
• If you try to record bilingual audio onto a Video  
mode DVD-RW / R and +VR mode DVD+RW / R  
disc and when “Bilingual” is selected, only either one  
of main or sub audio will be recorded. (See “Setting  
Bilingual Recording Audio” on page 40 for more  
detail.)  
• When recording the bilingual audio from the external  
equipment, make sure to select “Bilingual”. If you  
select “Stereo”, a mixture of main and sub audio will  
be heard when playing back.  
EN  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 47 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
To cancel the Satellite Link function while in the  
Satellite Link standby mode:  
Press [  
turn on the unit.  
ON / STANDBY] or [SATELLITE LINK] to  
Satellite Link  
HDD  
To cancel the Satellite Link function while the  
Satellite Link Recording is in progress:  
Press [STOP S].  
You can set the unit to start recording whenever it  
detects the scart control signal from the external  
tuner.  
Note  
Preparing for the Satellite Link Timer Recording:  
You cannot set the Start / End time for the Satellite  
Link Timer Recording on this unit.  
• The Satellite Link will not be activated unless the  
unit is in standby mode.  
• Recording will be paused while the copy protection  
or NTSC signal is being detected, and will resume  
when the copy protection or NTSC signal is no  
longer detected.  
• When a regular Timer Recording is completed, the  
unit will be turned off automatically.  
• When there is not enough space on the HDD, the  
unit cannot go into the Satellite Link Standby mode.  
Delete the unnecessary titles from the HDD in such  
case.  
• When a regular Timer Recording and the Satellite  
Link Timer Recording are overlapped, the regular  
Timer Recording has priority.  
[Preparation of the external tuner]  
• The external tuner should be equipped with  
some kind of timer function. Using timer function  
of the tuner, set it to be turned on when it comes  
to the time you want to start recording, and off  
when it comes to the time you want to finish  
recording. (Refer to the tuner’s manual on how  
to set the timer.)  
• Make sure to turn off the external tuner when  
you finish setting.  
[Preparation of this unit]  
• Make sure to select the desired Recording  
mode beforehand.  
• Make sure to set “Bilingual Recording Audio”,  
“Fast Dubbing Audio (Video Mode)” and  
“External Input Audio” in “Recording” setting  
correctly.  
Example 1  
External tuner (not supplied)  
Timer Recording  
Satellite Link  
Actual Recording  
Example 2  
Scart cable (not supplied)  
Timer Recording  
Satellite Link  
Actual Recording  
Example 3  
HDD / DVD / VCR  
AV2 (DODER)  
HDD/DVD  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
OUT VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
COAXIAL  
L
/CB  
P
B
P
AV1 (TV)  
Timer Recording  
Satellite Link  
R
OUT  
/CR  
R
Actual Recording  
Example 4  
1 Press [SATELLITE LINK].  
The unit will be turned off automatically as it goes  
into the Satellite Link standby mode.  
Timer Recording  
Satellite Link  
• “sat” will appear on the front panel display when  
you press [SATELLITE LINK].  
Actual Recording  
• When the Satellite Link Recording starts,  
counter and “IHDD” will appear on the front  
panel display.  
• When the Satellite Link Timer Recording is over,  
the unit returns to the Satellite Link standby  
mode unless you cancel the Satellite Link  
function.  
EN  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 48 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
• Duration of Fast Dubbing will depend on the Rec  
Mode, the title amount, and the disc type of the  
material to be dubbed.  
Information on Dubbing  
• Fast Dubbing is prohibited when;  
VR  
Video  
- Rec Mode is set to other than “Fast”.  
- dubbing from a Video mode DVD-RW / R to the  
HDD.  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VCR  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
- dubbing a title in HDD, which has been previously  
dubbed from a VR mode DVD-RW disc to the  
HDD, to a Video mode DVD-RW / R disc.  
- dubbing a title with the bilingual audio in HDD,  
which has been previously recorded with the “Fast  
Dubbing Audio (Video Mode)” set to “Off”, to a  
Video mode DVD-RW / R disc.  
- there is not enough space left in the disc when  
dubbing from HDD to DVD or vice versa.  
- dubbing a title in HDD, which has been recorded  
with EP mode, to DVD+RW / R disc.  
You can copy a HDD / DVD disc to a videotape or  
copy a videotape to a HDD / DVD disc. This function  
will be possible only if the DVD disc or the videotape  
is not copy protected.  
Before starting this function, prepare for the recording  
on the DVD-RW / R disc, DVD+RW / R disc or the  
videotape. See pages 34 to 37 (HDD / DVD) or page  
100 (VCR).  
Difference between Copy (dubbing) and Move:  
COPY (dubbing)  
programme  
MOVE  
Note  
• If you want to dub programmes from both lists  
(Original List and Playlist), finish up the dubbing of  
one list first and then make dubbing of the other list.  
• NTSC dubbing is prohibited in this unit.  
• During Fast Dubbing of copy-once programmes, the  
following operations are not available:  
- Playback of the titles in HDD.  
programme  
HDD  
(internal)  
The programme remains.  
HDD  
(internal)  
The programme does not remain.  
• When any Rec Mode other than “Fast” is selected,  
- you only can watch the playback image of the title  
being dubbed (the audio cannot be changed also).  
- Elapsed dubbing time will be displayed in the Front  
Panel Display, but on the TV screen, it only shows  
“--:--:--(--h--m--s)”.  
• If you stop the bi-directional dubbing between HDD  
and DVD halfway;  
- Playing media : Nothing is moved. Contents  
remain in the media.  
programme  
DVD-RW  
programme  
DVD-RW  
Available dubbing direction for copy-once  
programme:  
From  
To  
DVD-RW (VR)  
*1,*2  
{
(CPRM-compatible)  
DVD-RW (VR)  
- Recording media: Nothing is dubbed. With regard  
to DVD-R, the disc space used  
×
(Not CPRM-compatible)  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
(Video)  
(Internal)  
for the dubbing process will be  
lost (even though nothing is  
×
DVD-R / +RW / +R  
Videotape  
×
{
×
dubbed).  
*2  
HDD (Internal)  
Videotape  
One Touch Dubbing  
VR  
DVD-RW (VR)  
Videotape  
*2  
{
Video  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
HDD (Internal)  
{
DVD-RW (VR)  
(CPRM-compatible)  
*2  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
{
DVD-RW (VR)  
(Not CPRM-compatible)  
1 Insert a recordable disc when  
dubbing from HDD to DVD.  
×
×
DVD-R / +RW / +R  
Insert a disc to be dubbed when  
dubbing from DVD to HDD.  
: Available  
{
×: Not available  
*1:The programme (recorded) moves. (It will be  
deleted from HDD.)  
2 Start the playback of the contents  
you want to dub.  
*2: You cannot dub the recorded programme to HDD  
or DVD-RW again. (Copy control signal will be  
recorded to the videotape.)  
3 Press [DUBBING] during playback.  
Confirmation message will appear.  
(Refer to page 36 for details about CPRM.)  
4 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
Fast Dubbing:  
This unit is compatible with the bi-directional Fast  
Dubbing between HDD and DVD-RW / R or  
DVD+RW / R.  
Fast Dubbing offers you the dubbing speed of 32  
times the SLP mode dubbing for DVD-RW / R and 9.6  
times the LP mode dubbing for DVD+RW / R. To  
perform the Fast Dubbing, set the Rec Mode to  
“Fast”. (See pages 53 to 54.)  
then press [ENTER].  
The dubbing will start.  
• When One Touch Dubbing is completed,  
completion message will be displayed on the  
screen for a few seconds.  
• The dubbing will stop automatically when it  
reaches the end of the title.  
EN  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 49 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
To stop One Touch Dubbing manually, follow  
the instructions below.  
1 Press and hold [DUBBING] for 4 seconds.  
2 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P], then press  
[ENTER].  
Completion message will appear and the  
dubbing will stop.  
3 Press [ENTER] to remove the message.  
1 There are three ways to start One  
Touch Dubbing.  
Method 1 (Videotape to DVD):  
Play the contents of videotape you want to  
dub. When it comes to the point where you  
want to start dubbing from, press  
[STOP S] or [PAUSE p]. Then, press  
[DUBBING VCR DVD] on the front  
panel. The dubbing will start from there to  
the end.  
Note  
• If there is not enough space left on the disc, the  
prohibited icon “ ” will appear and the dubbing  
will not be started.  
• The Rec Mode will be set to “Auto” for the One  
Touch Dubbing.  
Method 2 (HDD to DVD):  
One Touch Dubbing from HDD or  
Videotape to DVD  
Start the playback of the title you want to  
dub. Press [DUBBING] or  
[DUBBING HDD DVD] on the front  
panel. The dubbing will start from the  
beginning of the title to the end.  
Method 3 (HDD to DVD):  
If you press [DUBBING HDD DVD] on  
the front panel in stop mode without  
selecting any title, the unit will start  
dubbing the last title in the Original List or  
the Playlist. It will start dubbing the title in  
the Original List if the Original List was the  
last selected list. It will start dubbing the  
title in the Playlist if the Playlist was the  
last selected list.  
With One Touch Dubbing, you can start dubbing right  
away with just one touch.  
Before:  
[General]  
• Recordable DVD must be in the unit. (See  
pages 34 to 36.)  
• There should be enough space on the recording  
DVD.  
• Make sure to press the corresponding Device  
Select Button before using the device of your  
choice.  
• If the title was in the resume stop mode, the  
dubbing will start from the beginning to the end  
of the resume stopped title.  
• If the title was in the regular stop mode, the  
dubbing will start from the beginning to the end  
of the last title.  
• If there is not enough space left on the disc, the  
prohibited icon “ ” will appear and the dubbing  
will not be started.  
• Dubbing cannot be executed during recording of  
any device.  
[Videotape to DVD dubbing]  
• A videotape to be dubbed must be in the unit.  
Limitations:  
[General]  
• You cannot dub to the finalised Video mode  
DVDs.  
• You cannot dub to the protected VR mode  
DVDs.  
• You cannot dub to the DVD if the number of the  
titles or the chapters of the disc is at its limit.  
• Dubbing cannot be executed while the Setup  
Menu is showing.  
[HDD to DVD dubbing]  
• If a copy control signal is detected, the dubbing  
cannot be started.  
• Dubbing cannot be executed during HDD or  
DVD recording.  
[Videotape to DVD dubbing]  
• If a copy control signal is detected during  
dubbing, the dubbing will be stopped.  
• Copy-once programmes which are recorded  
directly from the TV can be dubbed to the  
HDD / DVD.  
• Copy-once programmes which are copied from  
the HDD / DVD to a videotape cannot be  
dubbed further from the videotape to the HDD /  
DVD.  
• Be noted that with videotape to DVD dubbing,  
the unit recognise DVD’s remaining time as the  
dubbing duration although the actual dubbing  
will end when the videotape ends.  
EN  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 50 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Note  
[HDD to DVD dubbing]  
You cannot switch the device mode except between  
HDD and VCR during HDD to DVD dubbing. No  
limitation for High Speed Dubbing.  
Preparing to dub.  
[Videotape to DVD dubbing]  
Please wait for a moment.  
• When dubbing starts, the video image may be  
distorted because of the Digital Tracking function.  
This is not a malfunction. Play the videotape until  
the image clears up and then start the dubbing.  
• Playback audio is determined by the setting you  
make in “Selecting the Sound Mode” section on  
page 102.  
• Dubbing takes as much time as the playback does.  
You cannot switch the device mode except between  
HDD and DVD during videotape to DVD dubbing.  
• If you want to watch the dubbed material, after the  
VCR to DVD dubbing, press [DVD] first then press  
[PLAY P].  
[HDD to DVD dubbing]  
HDD  
DVD  
10%  
[Videotape to DVD dubbing]  
2 The dubbing will stop automatically  
when it reaches the end of the title or  
videotape. If you want to stop the  
dubbing manually, follow the  
instructions below.  
To stop the dubbing in progress:  
1 Press [DUBBING] for 4 seconds. Confirmation  
window will appear.  
2 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L/ P], then press  
[ENTER].  
3 Press [ENTER] to exit.  
Cancelling the dubbing.  
OK to proceed?  
Yes  
No  
EN  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 51 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
3 Select “Add to Title”.  
Dubbing from HDD / DVD to Videotape  
• If “Add to Title” is already highlighted, press  
[ENTER].  
• If one of the Dubbing Titles is highlighted, select  
“Add to Title” using [Cursor U/ D], then press  
[ENTER].  
To switch Original and Playlist, press [MODE]  
before you press [ENTER].  
You can copy the contents of the HDD / DVD to a  
videotape.  
HDDVCR Dubbing  
1/1  
Limitations:  
Title to dub  
Mode  
• If a copy control signal is detected during  
dubbing, the dubbing will be stopped.  
Add to Title  
All Erase  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
SP  
SP  
Limitation (DVD to VCR):  
• The contents of DVDs made on this unit can be  
dubbed. Any other discs cannot be dubbed.  
Start  
Preparing for dubbing:  
• Insert a recordable videotape with a record tab  
intact.  
• Make sure that the videotape has enough space  
to record the contents.  
• If you are dubbing a title contains both main and  
sub audio, set the audio type you want to dub.  
To set the audio type, refer to “Switching Audio  
Soundtrack” on page 75. If you want to dub both  
main and sub audio, select “Main / Sub” when  
you set the audio type.  
• If you have registered any dubbing before, they  
will be listed in the Dubbing Title List.  
• Contents in the Dubbing Title List will be deleted  
when you select the different dubbing direction.  
To sort the titles:  
1 Press [ENTER] anywhere in the Title List.  
2 Select “Title Sorting” using [Cursor U/ D],  
then press [ENTER].  
3 Select the desired sort type and press [ENTER].  
Preparing for dubbing (DVD to VCR):  
• If you are dubbing from a disc, insert a disc to be  
dubbed.  
4 Select a desired title using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
5 Select “Register” using  
1 Press [DUBBING].  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode Menu  
will appear.  
HDD Original  
2 For HDD to VCR dubbing:  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
Select “HDD  
VCR Dubbing” using  
001/001  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
For DVD to VCR dubbing:  
Title Name  
Register  
Recording Date  
P01 12:22 (1:0
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
Title Sorting  
P01 11:22 (0:1
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Select “DVD  
VCR Dubbing” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Dubbing Top Menu will appear.  
Example: HDD VCR  
Dubbing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
The selected title is added to the Dubbing Title  
List.  
• Contents in the Dubbing Title List will be deleted  
HDDDVD Dubbing  
DVDHDD Dubbing  
HDDVCR Dubbing  
VCRHDD Dubbing  
DVDVCR Dubbing  
VCRDVD Dubbing  
when you exit by pressing [  
ON / STANDBY]  
or select the different dubbing direction.  
EN  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 52 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
6 Repeat the steps 3 to 5 until you  
9 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
select all programmes to be dubbed.  
then press [ENTER].  
To delete a title:  
1 Select a title using [Cursor U/ D], then press  
[ENTER].  
HDD VCR Dubbing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:53  
2 Select “Delete” using [Cursor U/ D], then  
press [ENTER].  
3 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L/ P], then press  
[ENTER].  
Please Select Rec Mode  
Start dubbing.  
OK toproceed?
Fast  
Auto  
No  
Yes  
To move a title:  
1 Select a title using [Cursor U/ D], then press  
[ENTER].  
2 Select “Move” using [Cursor U/ D], then  
press [ENTER].  
• Dubbing will start.  
3 Enter a desired insert point using  
[Cursor U/ D], then press [ENTER].  
7 After registering all the programmes  
you want, select “Start” using  
[Cursor U / D / L/ P], then press  
[ENTER].  
8 Select a desired Rec Mode using  
[Cursor L / P], then press [ENTER].  
HDD VCR Dubbing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:53  
HDD  
SP  
VCR Dubbing  
Please Select Rec Mode  
SP LP EP  
• It may take awhile to prepare for the dubbing.  
Fast  
XP  
SLP  
Auto  
To stop the dubbing in progress:  
Press [DUBBING] for 4 seconds.  
Note  
You cannot change the device mode between VCR  
and HDD / DVD during the HDD / DVD to VCR  
dubbing.  
• If you want to watch the duplicated material, after  
the DVD to VCR duplication, press [VCR] first then  
press [PLAY P].  
• Depending on the dubbing direction or the  
recording format type, the available Rec Mode  
will vary.  
EN  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 53 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Example: HDD DVD  
Bi-directional Dubbing between HDD  
and DVD  
HDDDVD Dubbing  
Remain  
4300MB  
Mode  
1/1  
Title to dub  
Add to Title  
All Erase  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
SP  
SP  
The basic procedure to make a dubbing from the  
Setup Menu is as follows:  
Start  
1 Select dubbing direction.  
2 Register titles in the Dubbing Title List.  
3 Edit the Dubbing Title List as you prefer.  
4 Select Rec Mode.  
• If you have registered any dubbing before, they  
will be listed in the Dubbing Title List.  
To sort the titles:  
1 Press [ENTER] anywhere in the Title List.  
2 Select “Title Sorting”.  
3 Select the desired sort type and press  
[ENTER].  
5 Start dubbing.  
When you dub a title has bilingual audio to Video  
mode DVD-RW / R and DVD+RW / R, select an  
appropriate audio format in the “Bilingual Recording  
Audio” menu on page 40.  
5 Select a desired title using  
1 Insert a recordable disc when  
dubbing from HDD to DVD.  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Insert a disc to be dubbed when  
dubbing from DVD to HDD.  
6 Select “Register” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Example: HDD Original  
2 Press [DUBBING].  
The Dubbing Direction will appear.  
HDD Original  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
3 For HDD to DVD dubbing:  
001/001  
Select “HDD  
DVD Dubbing” using  
Title Name  
Register  
Recording Date  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
For DVD to HDD dubbing:  
P01 12:22 (1:0
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
Title Sorting  
P01 11:22 (0:1
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Select “DVD  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
“DVD HDD Dubbing” is not  
HDD Dubbing” using  
available when the +VR mode and  
Video mode disc recorded by other  
units is inserted.  
The selected title is added to the Dubbing Title  
List.  
• Contents in the Dubbing Title List will be deleted  
when you exit by pressing [  
ON / STANDBY]  
or select the different dubbing direction.  
Dubbing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
HDDDVD Dubbing  
DVDHDD Dubbing  
HDDVCR Dubbing  
VCRHDD Dubbing  
DVDVCR Dubbing  
VCRDVD Dubbing  
7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 until you register  
all the programmes to be dubbed.  
To delete a title:  
1 Select a title using [Cursor U / D], then press  
[ENTER].  
2 Select “Delete” using [Cursor U / D], then  
press [ENTER].  
3 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P], then press  
[ENTER].  
4 Select “Add to Title”.  
• If “Add to Title” is already highlighted, press  
[ENTER].  
• If one of the Dubbing Titles is highlighted, select  
“Add to Title” using [Cursor U/ D/ L/ P], then  
press [ENTER].  
To switch Original and Playlist, press [MODE]  
before you press [ENTER].  
EN  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 54 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
To move a title:  
1 Select a title using [Cursor U / D], then press  
[ENTER].  
10 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
2 Select “Move” using [Cursor U/ D], then press  
[ENTER].  
HDD DVD Dubbing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:53  
3 Select a desired insert point using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Please Select Rec Mode  
Start dubbing.  
OK toproceed?
To change the title name:  
1 Select a title using [Cursor U / D], then press  
[ENTER].  
Fast  
Auto  
No  
Yes  
Titl
Sp
50MB  
35MB  
2 Select “Change Name” using [Cursor U / D],  
then press [ENTER].  
3 Enter a desired name. Refer to “Guide to Edit  
Title Name” on page 85.  
Dubbing will start.  
To erase all the titles in the Dubbing Title List:  
1 Select “All Erase” using [Cursor U / D / L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
2 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P], then press  
[ENTER].  
Preparing to dub.  
Please wait for a moment.  
8 After registering all the programmes  
you want, select “Start” using  
[Cursor U/ D/ L/ P], then press  
[ENTER].  
9 Select a desired Rec Mode using  
[Cursor L / P], then press [ENTER].  
HDD DVD Dubbing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:53  
HDD  
DVD  
10%  
Please Select Rec Mode  
SP LP EP  
Fast  
XP  
SLP  
Auto  
Title amount  
Space available  
1350MB  
4335MB  
• Depending on the dubbing direction or the  
recording format type, the available Rec Mode  
will vary.  
• Select “Fast” if you want to perform the “Fast  
Dubbing” (see “Fast Dubbing” on page 48 for  
more details).  
• Fast Dubbing is prohibited in this unit if a title  
has been recorded using the NTSC system.  
• “Fast” is not available when dubbing from a  
Video mode disc to the HDD.  
• It may take awhile to prepare for the dubbing.  
• During Fast Dubbing, the playback picture will  
not appear.  
• When dubbing is completed, completion  
message will be displayed on the screen for a  
few seconds.  
To stop the dubbing in progress:  
1 Press [DUBBING] for 4 seconds. Confirmation  
window will appear.  
2 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P], then press  
[ENTER].  
When “Auto” is selected (Just Dubbing):  
• Basically the Rec Mode is set to “Fast”, but it will  
be changed automatically under the conditions  
listed below;  
3 Press [ENTER] to exit.  
- HDD to DVD dubbing;  
the Rec Mode will automatically be adjusted  
so the titles will fit nicely in the remaining  
space of the disc when there is not enough  
space in the disc.  
- DVD to HDD dubbing;  
the Rec Mode will automatically be adjusted  
for the titles to fit a 4.7 GB DVD.  
EN  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 55 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Example: VCR HDD  
Dubbing from Videotape to HDD / DVD  
Dubbing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
HDDDVD Dubbing  
DVDHDD Dubbing  
HDDVCR Dubbing  
VCRHDD Dubbing  
DVDVCR Dubbing  
VCRDVD Dubbing  
You can copy the contents of a videotape to HDD or  
DVD disc.  
Limitation:  
• If a copy control signal is detected during  
dubbing, the dubbing will be stopped.  
4 Select a desired Rec Mode using  
[Cursor L / P], then press [ENTER].  
Limitations (VCR to HDD):  
• With VCR to HDD dubbing, the unit recognise  
the HDD’s remaining time as the dubbing  
duration. The maximum possible duration is 10  
hours and 30 minutes.  
VCR HDD Dubbing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:53  
Please Select Rec Mode  
SP LP EP  
Fast  
XP  
SLP  
Auto  
Limitations (VCR to DVD):  
• You cannot dub to the finalised Video mode  
DVDs.  
Space available  
154335MB  
• You cannot dub to the protected VR mode  
DVDs.  
• Copy-once programmes which are recorded  
directly from the TV can be dubbed to the HDD  
and CPRM compatible VR mode DVD-RW.  
• Copy-once programmes which are copied from  
the HDD / DVD to a videotape cannot be  
dubbed further from the videotape to the HDD /  
DVD.  
Confirmation window will appear.  
5 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
VCR HDD Dubbing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:53  
• With VCR to DVD dubbing, the unit recognise  
DVD’s remaining time as the dubbing duration  
although the actual dubbing will end when the  
videotape ends.  
Please Select Rec Mode  
Start dubbing.  
OK toproceed?
Fast  
Auto  
No  
Yes  
Sp
Preparing for dubbing:  
35MB  
• Insert a videotape to be dubbed.  
Preparing for dubbing (VCR to HDD):  
• Make sure there is enough space on the HDD.  
Dubbing will start.  
Preparing for dubbing (VCR to DVD):  
When the dubbing is completed, completion  
message will be displayed on the screen for a few  
seconds.  
• Insert a recordable DVD. (See pages 34 to 37.)  
• Make sure there is enough space on the DVD.  
Press [VCR] first.  
To stop the dubbing in progress:  
1 Press [DUBBING] for 4 seconds. Confirmation  
window will appear.  
2 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L/ P], then press  
[ENTER].  
1 Press [PLAY P] to start playback of  
the videotape, and press [STOP S]  
when it reaches the point where you  
want to start dubbing.  
3 Press [ENTER] to exit.  
Note  
2 Press [DUBBING].  
• The device mode change is available only between  
HDD and DVD during the videotape to the HDD /  
DVD dubbing.  
• After starting dubbing, the picture may be distorted  
because of the digital tracking function. This is not a  
malfunction. Be advised to play back the videotape  
until the picture is stabilised, then set the starting  
point at which you wish to start recording, and start  
dubbing.  
The Dubbing Direction will appear.  
3 For HDD dubbing:  
Select “VCR  
HDD Dubbing” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
For DVD dubbing:  
Select “VCR  
DVD Dubbing” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
• Playback audio is determined by the setting you  
make in the “Selecting the Sound Mode” section on  
page 102.  
EN  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 56 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Setting for External Connection  
(AV3)  
Dubbing from the External  
Devices  
VR  
Video  
Connect the external equipment using either the input  
jacks, AV1(TV) (Rear), AV2(DECODER) (Rear) or  
AV3 (Front). However, for AV3 jacks, you have to  
select S-VIDEO input or VIDEO input jacks  
depending on the connected devices.  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VCR  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
When you dub a title has bilingual audio to Video  
mode DVD-RW / R and +VR mode DVD+RW / R,  
select an appropriate audio format in the “Bilingual  
Recording Audio” menu on page 40.  
Use a commercially available Scart, S-Video or Video  
cable and an Audio cable for this connection.  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
1 Turn on the TV. Select the  
appropriate external input channel.  
(See pages 23 to 24.)  
Setup Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Initial Setting” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
2 Select the media.  
Dubbing to HDD:  
Press [HDD] first.  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Dubbing to DVD:  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Press [DVD] first and insert a disc.  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
• It may take awhile to load the disc.  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Dubbing to a videotape:  
Press [VCR] and insert a videotape.  
Recording  
Display  
3 Select the appropriate external input  
channel of this unit by pressing  
[INPUT SELECT ]. You also can  
3 Select “Select Video” using  
use [PROG.  
/
].  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
• If you are using the jacks on the front, set the  
channel to “AV3”.  
• If you are using the jacks on the rear, set the  
channel to “AV1” and “AV2”.  
Initial Setting  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
OSD Language  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
4 Select a Rec Mode by pressing  
[REC MODE].  
Select Video  
Video Out  
Refer to “Rec Mode” on page 35 for HDD / DVD  
or page 100 for VCR.  
5 Press [I REC] (of the dubbing  
device) on this unit to start dubbing.  
6 Press the PLAY button on the  
external device to dub from.  
4 Select the video input type you use,  
“Video In” or “S-Video In”, using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
7 For HDD or DVD:  
Press [STOP S] to stop dubbing.  
• This operation may take awhile to be completed.  
Then stop the external device.  
Initial Setting  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
For VCR:  
OSD Language  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
Press [STOP / EJECT O/S] to stop  
dubbing.  
Then stop the external device.  
Video In  
S-Video In  
Select Video  
Video Out  
Note  
To avoid mistakes, it is recommended to use the  
buttons on the front panel to operate.  
• Read also the instructions for the external device  
thoroughly.  
• If you want to monitor the programme that you are  
recording, make sure the device such as a Satellite  
Box is powered off or press [DISPLAY] when it is  
connected to AV2.  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
• The default setting is “Video In”.  
• NTSC dubbing is prohibited in this unit.  
5 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
EN  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 57 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
5 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
Finalising a Disc  
In order to play back discs recorded in this unit on  
other player, you must finalise the discs.  
• Although finalisation is recommended, you may be  
able to play the VR mode and +VR mode discs on  
other unit without finalising. With regard to the Video  
mode discs, you MUST finalise them before playing  
them back on other player.  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Finalise  
Auto Finalise  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
Finalise the disc.  
OK to proceed?  
No  
Yes  
• After DVD-R / +R discs are finalised, additional  
recording, editing and undo finalisation are  
impossible.  
• For DVD-R, Video mode DVD-RW, +VR mode  
DVD+RW / R discs, a DVD menu is created  
automatically after finalising discs, and title list for  
the discs will no longer be available.  
• If the disc has already been finalised, “Undo  
Finalise” will be listed in the menu instead of  
“Finalise” (DVD-RW and DVD+RW). To Undo  
the finalisation of the disc, select “Undo Finalise”  
and press [ENTER].  
Finalise  
VR  
Finalising will start.  
• This operation may take awhile to be completed.  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
Note  
You must first finalise the disc before playing it back  
on other unit.  
You cannot cancel finalising the disc once it has  
started.  
• After the finalisation of DVD+RW discs, Empty Title  
will appear on the last of Title List.  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Disc Management” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Display  
3 Select “DVD Disc Control” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
4 Select “Finalise” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Finalise  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
Auto Finalise  
Disc Protect  
EN  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 58 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Auto Finalise  
Setting Disc Protection  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
DVD+R  
You can protect a disc from the accidental overwriting,  
editing or erasing.  
You can finalise discs automatically when the disc  
space runs out if you set this in the Setup Menu.  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Disc Management” using  
2 Select “Disc Management” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Editing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Display  
Recording  
Display  
3 Select “DVD Disc Control” using  
3 Select “DVD Disc Control” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
4 Select “Auto Finalise” using  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Finalise  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
Auto Finalise  
Disc Protect  
4 Select “Disc Protect” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
5 Select “On” using [Cursor U / D],  
then press [ENTER].  
Finalise  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
Auto Finalise  
Disc Protect  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Finalise  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
Auto Finalise  
Auto Finalise  
On  
Off  
• If the disc has already been protected, “Disc  
Undo Protect” will be listed in the menu instead  
of “Disc Protect”.  
The unit automatically finalises the disc when the  
disc space runs out.  
Your setting is activated.  
• The default setting is “Off”.  
6 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
• Auto Finalise is not available while the Setup Menu  
is displayed.  
EN  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 59 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
5 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
Disc Management  
DVD Format  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Finalise  
Auto Finalise  
Protect the disc.  
DVD Disc Control  
HDD Initialise  
OK to proceed?  
No  
Yes  
The disc is protected.  
• The default setting is “No”.  
6 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
• Disc Protect is available for VR mode DVD-RW  
discs and +VR mode DVD+RW / R discs.  
EN  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 60 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Playback  
Disc  
Logo  
Information on Playback  
Read the following information before you play back a  
DVD.  
DVD-Video  
Playable Discs  
DVD-RW  
(VIDEO/VR mode,  
DivX® files)  
You can play back all the discs listed on the right.  
Before attempting to play back a DVD, make sure it  
meets the requirements for Region Codes and Colour  
Systems as described in this section. Discs that bear  
any of the logos shown below will be played back  
correctly in this unit. Other disc types are not  
guaranteed to be played back.  
DVD-R  
(VIDEO mode,  
DivX® files)  
DVD+RW  
(+VR mode,  
DivX® files)  
Colour Systems  
DVDs are recorded using different colour systems  
throughout the world. The most common colour  
system, used primarily in the U.K. and other EU  
countries, is PAL.  
DVD+R  
(+VR mode,  
DivX® files)  
This unit uses the PAL system. However, it is also  
possible to play back DVDs using other colour  
systems, such as NTSC.  
CD-DA  
(AUDIO CD)  
Region Codes  
This unit has been designed to play back DVDs for  
Region Two (2). It is only possible to play back DVDs  
in this unit that are labelled for Region 2 or for ALL  
regions. You cannot play back DVDs that are labelled  
for other regions. Look for DVDs that bear either of  
the symbols shown below. If these region symbols do  
not appear on your DVD, you cannot play back the  
DVD in this unit.  
VCD (VIDEO CD)  
DIGITAL VIDEO  
CD-RW  
(CD-DA FORMAT,  
MP3, JPEG,  
DivX® files)  
CD-R  
(CD-DA FORMAT,  
MP3, JPEG,  
DivX® files)  
The number inside the globe refers to region of the  
world.  
A DVD labelled for a specific region can only be  
played back in the unit with the same region code.  
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
EN  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 61 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Note  
• Some discs may start playback automatically.  
• If no resume point is set when you stop HDD or DVD  
playback, it will start from beginning of the last title.  
• If playback and recording are in progress at the  
same time, select the appropriate device by  
pressing [HDD] or [DVD] before you press  
[PAUSE p] or [STOP S] to pause or stop the  
operation.  
Basic Playback  
Hint for HDD / DVD Playback  
The contents of a HDD / DVD are generally divided  
into titles. Titles are sometimes further subdivided into  
chapters.  
Start Rec.  
Title 1  
Stop/Start  
Stop Rec.  
Playback from the Title List Menu  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
Title 2  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
(Not available for the DVD-Videos, the finalised Video  
mode DVDs, or the Video mode discs made on other  
unit)  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
If you are playing the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you are playing a disc, press [DVD] first.  
Direct Playback  
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Direct  
Playback” on the left.  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-V  
• If you are playing the HDD, follow step 2.  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
CD  
2 Press [TOP MENU].  
Title List Menu will appear.  
Press [MODE] to switch Original / Playlist if  
necessary.  
If you are playing the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you are playing a disc, press [DVD] first.  
To exit the Title List Menu, press [RETURN] or  
[SETUP] twice.  
1 Turn on the TV. Select the  
appropriate external input channel.  
(See pages 23 to 24.)  
3 Select a desired title using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
• If you are playing the HDD, proceed to step 5.  
• Use [Cursor U / D] to move among the titles  
one by one, and use [SKIP F] or  
[SKIP B] to jump to the next / previous Title  
List page.  
2 Press [OPEN / CLOSE O] to open the  
disc tray.  
3 Place the disc on the disc tray with  
its label facing up. Be sure to align  
the disc with the disc tray guide.  
4 Select “Play” using [Cursor U / D].  
Then press [ENTER].  
Playback will start. For HDD, if any resume point  
has been set, the playback will start from the  
resume point.  
5 Press [STOP S] to stop playback.  
Note  
Disc tray  
guide  
• Title edited by hidden-title on other units cannot be  
played back although the title name is displayed on  
the Top Menu. If you play the hidden-title, the next  
playable title will be played back.  
4 Press [OPEN / CLOSE O] to close  
the disc tray.  
5 Press [PLAY P] to start playback.  
Playback will start.  
• Depending on the media, the playback may start  
from a resume point. (See page 69.)  
• If you are playing back a DVD-Video, a Disc  
Menu may appear. See page 67 for more details  
about the Disc Menu.  
6 Press [STOP S] to stop playback.  
EN  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 62 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Changing the Order of the Title  
Display  
Playback from the DVD Menu  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
With finalised Video mode DVDs or the Video mode  
DVDs and +VR mode DVDs made on other units, a  
DVD Menu may be appeared instead of the Title List.  
DVD Menus are created automatically when you  
finalise a Video mode disc. With such discs, Title List  
is no longer available.  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
You can display the titles by order of name, date or  
unplayed (HDD only).  
Follow the steps below to play back a disc using the  
DVD Menu.  
Press [DVD] or [HDD].  
1 Press [TOP MENU] to display the  
Press [DVD] first.  
Title List Menu, then press [ENTER].  
1 Insert a disc.  
2 Select “Title Sorting” using  
DVD Menu may appear automatically. Otherwise,  
[Cursor U / D]. Then press [ENTER].  
press [TOP MENU] to call up the DVD Menu.  
Example: DVD-R  
3 Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
DVD MENU  
Note  
P42 0:20 (0:01:47) SP  
• When the titles are sorted and displayed by the  
names, folders may be created for each names. In  
order to display the contents of the files, press  
[ENTER] on desired files, and select “Contents  
Display” using [Cursor U / D] and then press  
[ENTER].  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P01 1:10 (0:30:00) EP  
Empty Title  
P20 1:20 (0:00:47) EP  
P99 10:20 (0:20:00) LP  
P12 12:20 (0:30:00) EP  
P09 0:20 (0:30:00) SP  
AV3 7:20 (0:10:00) XP  
Empty Title  
QUIT  
• The folders created for the title sorted by name will  
disappear if you sort the titles by date or by  
unplayed titles.  
• This feature is not available for finalised Video mode  
DVDs and +VR mode DVDs.  
2 Select a desired title using  
[Cursor U/ D / L/ P], then press  
[PLAY P] or [ENTER].  
Playback will start.  
Prev.  
Fwd.  
• Select  
previous Title List page.  
• Select , then press [ENTER] to exit. If you  
call up the DVD menu during DVD playback, the  
playback resume when you select  
or  
to jump to the next /  
QUIT  
QUIT  
.
3 Press [STOP S] to stop playback.  
Note  
• DVD Menu and operation may vary depending on  
the discs.  
Playing Back a Video CD  
VCD  
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Direct  
Playback” on page 61.  
2 Press [PLAY P] to start playback.  
Playback will start.  
• If a menu appears, see page 68 for details.  
3 Press [STOP S] to stop playback.  
EN  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 63 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Note  
Playing Back an MP3  
• MP3 files cannot be recorded as digital sound using  
an MD or DAT deck.  
• Files with extensions other than “.mp3 (MP3)” will  
not be listed in the File List.  
• Some folders or files listed in the File List may be  
unplayable due to their recording status.  
• The File List displays only up to 8 folder and file  
names.  
MP3  
Press [DVD] first.  
1 Press [TOP MENU] to call up the MP3  
List after a disc is inserted.  
File List  
19:50  
Playing Back a JPEG  
001/004  
File Name  
Date  
JPEG  
001.MP3  
002.MP3  
003.MP3  
004.MP3  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
Press [DVD] first.  
1 Press [TOP MENU] to call up the  
JPEG List after a disc is inserted.  
To exit the MP3 list, press [TOP MENU] or  
[RETURN].  
• If there are more than one page of MP3 list,  
File List  
19:50  
press [SKIP  
press [SKIP  
F
B
]
]
to jump to the next page, or  
to jump to the previous page.  
001/004  
File Name  
Date  
001.jpg  
002.jpg  
003.jpg  
004.jpg  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
2 Press [Cursor U / D] to select the  
desired folder (group) or file (track),  
then press [ENTER].  
If a file is selected:  
Playback will start.  
If a folder is selected:  
To exit the JPEG list, press [TOP MENU] or  
[RETURN].  
• If there are more than one page of JPEG list,  
press [SKIP F] to jump to the next page, or  
press [SKIP B] to jump to the previous page.  
The files in the folder will appear.  
Press [Cursor U / D] to select a file or folder you  
want, then press [ENTER].  
• Press [ENTER] to move to any lower folders.  
• Press [RETURN] to move back to the folder  
above.  
2 Press [Cursor U / D] to select the  
desired folder (group) or file (track),  
then press [ENTER].  
3 Press [STOP S] to stop playback.  
Hints for MP3 files:  
If a file is selected:  
Playback will start.  
• Folders are known as Groups, Files are known  
as Tracks.  
• Folders are shown with the  
icon.  
If a folder is selected:  
• The system can recognise up to 255 groups (or  
folders) per disc, and up to 999 tracks (or files)  
per disc.  
• The name of group and track can be displayed  
up to 32 characters. Unrecognisable characters  
The files in the folder will appear.  
Press [Cursor U / D] to select a file or folder you  
want, then press [ENTER].  
• Press [ENTER] to move to any lower folders.  
• Press [RETURN] to move back to the folder  
above.  
will be replaced with asterisks ( ).  
*
• Unplayable groups and tracks may be displayed  
depending on the recording conditions.  
• For MP3 file recorded in Variable Bit Rate  
(VBR), the unit may not display the actual  
elapsed time.  
3 Press [STOP S] to stop playback.  
Notes on JPEG:  
After the file is displayed for 5 seconds or 10 seconds  
(see “Slide Show” on page 74), the display will move  
to the next file.  
During JPEG playback, press [Cursor P] or  
[Cursor L] to rotate a picture 90 degrees clockwise or  
counterclockwise respectively. (Not available when  
the display menu appears.)  
It is recommended that files to be played back in  
this unit are recorded under the following  
specifications:  
[MP3]  
• Sampling frequency: 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz  
Files with extensions other than “.jpg/.jpeg (JPEG)”  
will not be listed in the File List.  
• Constant Bit Rate:  
112 kbps to 320 kbps  
EN  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 64 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
[JPEG] Size of picture  
Hint for the purchased or rental official DivX®  
Certified product  
• When you purchased or rental a DivX® file through  
the DivX® Video-On-Demand (VOD) services, a  
registration code is required every time you get the  
new file from the DivX® VOD services. Refer to  
“DivX® VOD” on page 66.  
• Some DivX® VOD files are restricted with the limited  
playable times (you cannot play them back beyond  
the limit). If your DivX® VOD file has such limit,  
confirmation window will appear.  
Use [Cursor L / P] to select “Yes” if you want to  
play back the file, or to select “No” if you do not wish  
to play it back. Then press [ENTER].  
• Upper limit:  
• Lower limit:  
6300 x 5100 dots  
32 x 32 dots  
• Capacity limit: less than 12 MB  
• High resolution or large-size JPEG files take a few  
moments to be displayed.  
• It is impossible to play back progressive JPEGs  
(JPEG files saved in progressive format) on this  
unit.  
• It is impossible to play back JPEG files of 12 MB or  
more.  
• The name of group and track can be displayed up to  
32 characters. Unrecognisable characters will be  
replaced with asterisks ( ).  
*
Playing Back a DivX®  
®
®
DivX  
DivX(R) VOD Rental  
1 In stop mode, press [TOP MENU] to  
This rental has  
Do you want to use one  
views left.  
call up the DivX® List.  
of your  
Yes  
views now?  
No  
File List  
19:50  
001/004  
File Name  
Date  
You cannot play back the DivX® VOD files, of which  
rental period has been expired. In such case, press  
[TOP MENU] and select other files that can be  
played back.  
001.avi  
002.avi  
003.avi  
004.divx  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
To exit the DivX® list, press [TOP MENU] or  
Rental Expired  
[RETURN].  
This rental is expired.  
2 Press [Cursor U / D] to select the  
desired folder (group) or file (track),  
then press [ENTER].  
Please push TOP MENU’.  
If a file is selected:  
Playback will start.  
If a folder is selected:  
Hint  
The files in the folder will appear.  
Press [Cursor U / D] to select the file or folder  
you want, then press [ENTER].  
• Press [ENTER] to move to any lower folders.  
• Press [RETURN] to move back to the folder  
above.  
• DivX® is a codec (compression/decompression) that  
can compress images to a very small amount of  
data. The software can compress video data from  
almost any sources to the size that can be sent on  
the Internet without compromising visual quality of  
the images.  
• A file with an extension of “.avi” and “.divx” is called  
a DivX® file. All files with the “.avi” extension are  
recognised as MPEG4.  
It is recommended that files to be played back in  
this unit are recorded under the following  
specifications:  
• Files whose extension other than “.avi” and “.divx”  
will not be listed on the DivX® menu. However,  
unplayable groups or tracks may be displayed,  
depending on the recording conditions.  
• Even if the file has an extension of either “.avi” and  
“.divx”, this unit cannot play it back if it is recorded in  
the format other than DivX®.  
• Folders are known as Groups; files are known as  
tracks.  
• A maximum of 255 folders or 999 files may be  
recognised in one disc.  
[DivX®]  
• Official DivX® Certifiedproduct  
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6)  
with standard playback of DivX® media files.  
• Maximum size of image  
: 720 x 480 @30 fps  
720 x 576 @25 fps  
• Sampling frequency of audio : 8 kHz - 48 kHz  
• Audio type  
: MPEG1audiolayer2,  
MP3 (MPEG1, 2, 2.5  
audio layer3),  
Dolby Digital  
• Up to 8 hierarchies can be recognised in one folder.  
Files in the 9th or deeper hierarchies cannot be  
played back.  
EN  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 65 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
• The name of group and track can be displayed up to  
32 characters. Unrecognisable characters will be  
DivX® Subtitle  
replaced with asterisks ( ).  
*
• You can play back the disc recorded in multi-  
session.  
The subtitle created by the user can be displayed  
during DivX® playback.  
• Playback will be stopped if the File List is displayed  
during the playback.  
1 After the DivX® file is selected, the  
• It may take awhile for audio and images to be output  
after you inserted a disc and pressed [PLAY P].  
• When playing back the files recorded in high bit  
rates, the images can be interrupted in some  
occasions.  
Subtitle List will appear.  
Subtitle List  
• Although DivX® logo has been obtained for this unit,  
it may not be able to play back some data,  
depending on the characteristics, bit rates, or audio  
format settings, etc.  
File  
Subtitle 1  
Off  
Smi  
Srt  
• Use the software recognised by the DivX, Inc. when  
you make DivX® files.  
Sub  
• A DivX® file whose file size exceeds 2 GB cannot be  
played back.  
• When using tools or utilities to make up DivX® files,  
read their instruction manual beforehand.  
• Never use the MPEG4 tools when you make DivX®  
files. Otherwise, noise or disturbance of the picture  
and sound may be generated.  
• If a large-sized DivX® file is selected, it may take  
awhile to start the playback (over 20 seconds  
sometimes).  
• If DivX® files written on CD discs cannot be played  
back, rewrite them on a DVD disc and try to play  
back.  
• For more information for DivX®, please visit  
http://www.divx.com.  
2 Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
DivX® with the subtitle starts  
playback. The subtitle will not be  
displayed when the setting is “Off”.  
• If there is more than one extension, the  
extension selection will appear in the Subtitle  
List.  
Note  
• DivX® subtitle can only be displayed according to  
the same name with an extension of the DivX® file  
name.  
• Files whose extension is other than “.SMI”, “.smi”,  
“.SRT”, “.srt”, “.SUB” and “.sub” will not be listed in  
the Subtitle List.  
• You cannot play back the DivX® VOD files obtained  
with different registration codes on this unit. Press  
[TOP MENU] and select other files that can be  
played back.  
• This unit cannot be recognised if the DivX® file and  
its subtitle file are not in the one folder.  
• The subtitle may not be displayed if the file size is  
too large.  
To change the subtitle, refer to “DivX Subtitle” on  
page 95 if multiple subtitles are available.  
• The subtitle cannot display if the on-screen  
information is displayed.  
Authorization Error  
This player is not authorized to play  
this video.  
Please push ‘TOP MENU’.  
• If “DivX Subtitle” is set to “Off” in Playback menu,  
the Subtitle List will not be displayed even if you  
select a DivX® file with created subtitle. (Refer to  
“DivX Subtitle” on page 95.)  
• Unrecognisable characters will be replaced with  
asterisks ( ).  
*
• When the Status Display for Repeat, Search,  
Subtitle and Audio Sound Track setting or AV Select  
Menu is shown on the screen, the DivX® Subtitle will  
not be displayed.  
EN  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 66 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Playing Back Discs Contains Mixture  
of Different Type of Media  
DivX® VOD  
®
®
DivX  
For playing back a CD-RW / R that contains mixture of  
different type of media (DivX®, MP3, JPEG etc.), you  
need to setup which media to play.  
This unit allows you to play back the files purchased  
or rented from DivX® Video-On-Demand (VOD)  
services. The files are available on the Internet. When  
you purchase or rent DivX® VOD files on the Internet,  
you will be asked to enter a registration code. This  
menu item provides you the registration code.  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Playback” using  
1 Follow the steps 1 to 2 on the left to  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
display the Playback Menu.  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
2 Select “DivX(R)VOD” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Playback  
Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Still Mode  
Parental Lo
Angle Icon  
TV System  
DivX(R)VOD  
Your registration code is :  
Recording  
Display  
V. Replay/S
CD Playbac
Media Selec
To learn more visit :  
www.divx.com/vod  
DivX(R)VOD  
Initialise  
3 Select “Media Select” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Note  
Playback  
Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
• One registration code is only valid for one DivX®  
VOD file.  
Still Mode  
Parental Lock  
Angle Icon  
You must first download the file from the Internet  
and play it back on this unit before you are able to  
get another code.  
You must follow this step every time you purchase  
or rent a DivX® VOD file from the Internet.  
• For more information for DivX®, please visit  
http://www.divx.com/vod.  
TV System  
V. Replay/Skip Speed  
CD Playback Mode  
Media Select  
DivX(R)VOD  
Initialise  
4 Select the media to play using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Playback  
Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Still Mode  
Video  
Parental Lock  
Angle Icon  
Audio  
Picture  
TV System  
V. Replay/Skip Speed  
CD Playback Mode  
Media Select  
DivX(R)VOD  
Initialise  
Video : To play DivX® files.  
Audio : To play MP3 files.  
Picture : To play JPEG files.  
EN  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 67 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Playing Back Discs Using the Disc  
Menu  
Playing Back Discs Using the Title  
Menu  
DVD-V  
DVD-V  
A DVD contains a disc menu, which lists the contents  
and enables you to customise playback. The menu  
may offer choices for subtitle languages, special  
features and chapter selection. Usually this  
information appears automatically when you start  
playback, but sometimes you need to press  
[DISC MENU] to display the menu.  
Some DVDs have a title menu, which lists the titles  
available on the DVD. You can start playing back such  
discs at a specific title.  
Press [DVD] first.  
1 Press [TOP MENU].  
Title Menu will appear.  
Press [DVD] first.  
If the feature is not available, “ ” may appear on  
the TV screen.  
1 Press [DISC MENU].  
2 Select a desired item using  
[Cursor U / D / L / P], then press  
[ENTER].  
Disc Menu will appear.  
If the feature is not available, “ ” may appear on  
the TV screen.  
2 Select an item using  
[Cursor U / D / L / P], then press  
[ENTER].  
The disc will start playing back at the title you  
selected. The following operations are available.  
[TOP MENU] button:  
Displays the DVD “Title Menu” which will vary  
between discs.  
Repeat this step until all the features you want are  
set up or to start playing back the disc from the  
menu. The following operations are available.  
[Cursor U / D / L / P] buttons:  
Move the cursor from item to item on the screen.  
[DISC MENU] button:  
Displays the DVD Menu, which will vary among  
discs, and may be same with the Title menu.  
[ENTER] button:  
Selects the currently highlighted menu option.  
[Cursor U / D / L / P] buttons:  
Move the cursor from item to item on the screen.  
[the Number buttons]:  
Selects a numbered menu option (available on  
certain discs).  
[ENTER] button:  
Selects the currently highlighted menu option.  
3 Press [TOP MENU] to exit.  
[the Number buttons]:  
Selects a numbered menu option (available on  
certain discs).  
Note  
[TOP MENU] will not be available for some DVDs.  
• Menus vary among discs. Refer to the information  
accompanying the disc for details.  
3 Press [DISC MENU] to exit the disc  
menu.  
Depending on discs, pressing [DISC MENU] may  
not exit the disc menu.  
Note  
• Menus vary among discs. Refer to the information  
accompanying the disc for details.  
EN  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 68 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
2 Select “Playback” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
PBC Function for Video CDs  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
VCD  
Editing  
Dubbing  
This unit conforms to ver.1.1 and ver.2.0 of the Video  
CD standard playback control (PBC) function. This  
enables you to play back interactive software using  
menu screens. Refer to the information  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
accompanying the Video CD.  
Display  
Ver.1.1 (without PBC function): You can still enjoy  
playback of pictures and music from the CD.  
Ver.2.0 (with PBC function): “Pbc” will appear on the  
Front Panel Display when playing back a Video CD  
with the PBC function.  
3 Select “CD Playback Mode” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Hint  
Playback  
Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
• When playing back Video CDs with the PBC  
function, “Pbc” is displayed instead of the playing  
back time and current track indications on the Front  
Panel Display.  
Still Mode  
Parental Lock  
Angle Icon  
TV System  
V. Replay/Skip Speed  
CD Playback Mode  
Media Select  
DivX(R)VOD  
Initialise  
Note  
• Some operations cannot be performed unless the  
function is cancelled either automatically or  
intentionally by you.  
• Operations that are not available when the PBC  
function is set to “On” are indicated by the following  
symbol in this manual:  
4 Select “PBC” using [Cursor U / D],  
then press [ENTER].  
VCD  
(PBC OFF)  
Playback  
Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Still Mode  
Programme Play  
Parental Lock  
Angle Icon  
Playing Back a Video CD Using the  
Menu  
Slide Show  
PBC  
TV System  
V. Replay/Skip Speed  
CD Playback Mode  
Media Select  
DivX(R)VOD  
Initialise  
VCD  
1 When playing back a Video CD with  
the PBC function, the menu will  
appear automatically.  
5 Select “Off” using [Cursor U / D],  
then press [ENTER].  
2 Press [the Number buttons] to select  
Playback  
Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
the desired track.  
Playback will start at the selected track.  
Still Mode  
Programme Play  
Parental Lock  
Angle Icon  
Slide Show  
PBC  
3 Press [RETURN] to go back to the  
TV System  
PBC  
V. Replay/Ski
CD Playback
Media Select  
DivX(R)VOD  
Initialise  
menu.  
On  
Off  
Cancelling and Recalling the PBC  
Function  
6 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
VCD  
To recall the PBC function, select “On” at step 5  
above.  
Insert a Video CD.  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Note  
Setup Menu will appear.  
• The default setting of “PBC” is “On”.  
• The information of the setting “On” or “Off” is  
memorised even after the power is turned off or the  
disc tray is opened or closed.  
EN  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 69 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Note  
• For Video CDs, if you turn “PBC” on using the  
setting menu, the resume function is cancelled.  
• Resume point will be lost when you;  
- Open / Close the disc tray.  
Special Playback  
Resume Playback  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
MP3  
DVD-V  
Rapid Playback  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
CD  
VCD  
HDD  
DVD-V  
(PBC OFF)  
®
®
JPEG  
DivX  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
You can resume playback from the point where you  
stopped it before.  
Rapid Play function is available only during playback.  
Available only on discs recorded in the Dolby Digital  
format, Rapid Play plays back in a slightly faster/  
slower speed while keeping the sound quality just as  
normal playback.  
If you are playing the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you are playing a disc, press [DVD] first.  
1 During playback, press [STOP S].  
Press [STOP S] twice will cancel the Resume  
1 During playback, press  
function.  
[1.3x/0.8x PLAY].  
2 Press [PLAY P].  
P
: Press [1.3x/0.8x PLAY] once during  
playback. Plays back approximately at 0.8  
times of normal playback.  
In a few seconds, playback will resume from the  
point at which you stopped it before. Even if you  
turn off the unit, you can resume playback at the  
same point after the unit is powered on.  
P
: Press [1.3x/0.8x PLAY] twice during  
playback.  
Plays back approximately at 1.3 times of  
normal playback.  
For HDD:  
P
: Press [1.3x/0.8x PLAY] thrice to play back  
in normal speed. No effects.  
You can set a resume point per every title.  
• If you play back from the Title List Menu, you can  
choose “Play”. Otherwise the playback will start from  
the resume point of the last played title.  
• Press [STOP S] twice at step 1 if you do not want to  
set a resume point. In this case, next time you press  
[PLAY P], the playback will start from the beginning  
of the last recorded title in the Title List.  
2 Press [PLAY P] to resume the  
normal playback.  
Note  
• Audio (language) setting cannot be changed while  
using this mode.  
For DVDs:  
• This feature may not work at some point in a disc.  
• Audio is PCM during Rapid play mode.  
• When you select “PAL” in “TV System” (see page  
97), this function is not available with discs recorded  
using the NTSC system.  
You can set only one resume point per disc.  
• If a resume point is set, the playback will start from  
the resume point next time you press [PLAY P].  
• Press [STOP S] twice at step 1 if you do not want to  
set a resume point. In this case, next time you press  
[PLAY P], the playback will start from the beginning  
of the disc.  
For Video CD, Audio CD, MP3, JPEG and DivX®:  
You can set only one resume point per disc.  
• If a resume point is set, the playback will start from  
the resume point next time you press [PLAY P] if  
you are playing an Audio CD, DivX®, JPEG or Video  
CD with PBC off. As for the MP3 files, the resume  
playback will start from the beginning of the track  
last played.  
• Press [STOP S] twice at step 1 if you do not want to  
set a resume point. In this case, next time you press  
[PLAY P], the playback will start from the beginning  
of the disc.  
To cancel the resume playback and start playing  
back the disc from the beginning:  
Press [STOP S] while playback is stopped.  
EN  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 70 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Fast Forward / Fast Reverse Playback  
Slow Forward / Slow Reverse  
Playback  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
MP3  
DVD-V  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-V  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
CD  
VCD  
®
®
®
®
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
VCD DivX  
DivX  
If you are playing the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you are playing a disc, press [DVD] first.  
If you are playing the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you are playing a disc, press [DVD] first.  
1 During playback, press [PAUSE p],  
then press [FWD / SLOW f] or  
[SLOW / REV r].  
1 During playback, press  
[FWD / SLOW f] or  
[SLOW / REV r].  
Each time you press [FWD / SLOW f] or  
[SLOW / REV r], the approximate speed  
change as follows.  
Each time you press [FWD / SLOW f] or  
[SLOW / REV r], the approximate speed will  
change as follows.  
(The sound will remain muted.)  
Available Speed  
Available Speed  
Speed  
(HDD/DVD)  
Normal  
speed  
64x 32x 16x  
8x  
-
2x  
-
2x  
-
8x  
-
16x 32x 64x  
Speed  
(HDD/DVD)  
Normal  
speed  
-
-
-
-
1/8  
1/2  
1/4  
1/16  
-
-
Speed  
(CD)  
Normal  
speed  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
16x  
16x  
-
16x  
16x  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
OSD  
indication  
1
2
2
1
Speed  
(VCD)  
Normal  
speed  
8x  
8x  
8x  
2x  
-
2x  
-
8x  
8x  
8x  
Speed  
(VCD/DivX®)  
Normal  
speed  
-
-
-
-
1/2  
1/4  
1/8  
Speed  
(MP3)  
Normal  
speed  
OSD  
indication  
3
2
1
Speed  
(DivX®)  
Normal  
speed  
16x  
2x  
2x  
16x  
To return to normal playback, press [PLAY P].  
OSD  
indication  
r5 r4 r3 r2 r1  
f1 f2 f3 f4 f5  
Note  
• For Audio CDs, approximate speed is fixed at 16x  
with sound.  
• For Video CDs, approximate forward speeds are  
2x, 8x and 16x, and approximate reverse speeds  
are 2x, 8x and 16x.  
• For some DivX® files, Slow forward may not  
function.  
• Only slow forward is available when playing back  
Video CDs and discs with DivX® files.  
• For MP3 files, approximate speed is fixed at 8x.  
• For DivX® files, approximate forward speeds are  
2x, 8x and 16x, and approximate reverse speeds  
are 2x, 8x and 16x.  
Time Shift Playback  
HDD  
To return to play back at normal speed, press  
[PLAY P].  
• Picture quality of DivX® files in fast reverse is  
lower than that in fast forward.  
You can play back a title being recorded from the  
beginning while recording continues.  
• For some DivX® files, Fast forward/Fast reverse  
may not function.  
Press [HDD] first.  
1 Press [PLAY P] during recording.  
Note  
Playback of the title you are recording will start  
from the beginning.  
• Fast forward or fast reverse playback across titles  
(for HDD/DVD) or tracks (for VCD/MP3/DivX®) is  
impossible.  
• Elapsed playback time will be displayed in the  
Front Panel Display.  
2 To stop the playback, press [STOP S]  
once.  
• The Front Panel Display will switch back to  
show the elapsed recording time.  
Important  
If you press [STOP S] twice, it will stop the recording.  
EN  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 71 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Using the [TIME SLIP] button  
Pause  
With [TIME SLIP] button, even if you leave your  
couch while you are watching TV through this unit,  
you can come back and watch rest of the programme  
from right where you left at any convenient time with  
just one button.  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
MP3  
DVD-V  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
CD  
VCD  
®
®
JPEG  
DivX  
1 While viewing a TV broadcast via  
this unit, press [TIME SLIP].  
If you are playing the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you are playing a disc, press [DVD] first.  
This unit start to record the TV broadcast.  
1 During playback, press [PAUSE p].  
2 Press [TIME SLIP] again.  
Playback will pause with the sound muted.  
Playback will start from the point you press  
[TIME SLIP] first while recording continues.  
• While viewing the recorded content, you can  
pause and resume the playback by pressing  
[TIME SLIP].  
2 Press [PLAY P] to resume playback.  
Step by Step Playback  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
3 To stop the recording, press  
HDD  
DVD-V  
[STOP S] twice.  
®
®
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
VCD  
DivX  
Note  
• The contents you watched through the Time Slip  
playback will be stored in Title List.  
• You cannot use the OTR function during Time shift  
playback.  
• Before you start Time shift playback, make sure no  
resume point is set on other titles.  
• You can no longer fast forward the playback when it  
comes to the points listed below:  
- XP mode : 15 seconds before the current  
recording point.  
1 During playback, press [PAUSE p].  
2 Press [ADJUST+ ] or  
[-ADJUST ] repeatedly.  
Each time you press [ADJUST+  
], playback  
will go forward one frame (or step) at a time with  
the sound muted.  
To go backward one frame (or step), press  
[-ADJUST  
].  
- SP mode : 30 seconds before the current  
recording point.  
- LP mode : 60 seconds before the current  
recording point.  
3 Press [PLAY P] to resume playback.  
Note  
- EP mode : 90 seconds before the current  
recording point.  
• Only step by step forward is available when playing  
back Video CDs and discs with DivX® files.  
- SLP mode : 105 seconds before the current  
recording point.  
Simultaneous Playback and  
Recording  
HDD  
You can play back a title on HDD while making a  
recording on the same device.  
To do so, press [TOP MENU] during recording and  
select a title you like to play, and then press [ENTER].  
Press [Cursor U/ D] to select “Play” on the option  
window, and then press [ENTER].  
To play back a title being recorded while  
continuing to record, refer to “Time Shift  
Playback” on page 70.  
EN  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 72 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
4 While the picture is enlarged, press  
[Cursor U / D / L / P] to move the  
zoomed image up, down, left or right.  
Variable Replay / Variable Skip  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-V  
The grey box with an inner orange box that shows  
during Zoomed Playback is the position guide.  
The position of the orange box inside the grey box  
indicates the position of the zoomed image within  
the overall picture. The position guide disappears  
about after 3 seconds if there is no input.  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
During playback, you can skip forward or backward by  
the amount of time you set in the Setup Menu.  
To set the time amount, refer to “9. V. Replay/Skip  
Speed” on page 97.  
If you are playing the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you are playing a disc, press [DVD] first.  
Press [VARIABLE SKIP] if you want to  
skip forward.  
Press [VARIABLE REPLAY] if you want  
to skip backward.  
Zoom  
Note  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
To cancel the zoom function, select “x1.0” using  
DVD-V  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
®
®
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
DivX  
If you are playing the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you are playing a disc, press [DVD] first.  
1 During playback, press  
[AV SELECT].  
AV Select Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Zoom” using [Cursor U / D],  
then press [ENTER].  
Picture Quality  
Subtitle  
Angle  
Zoom  
Virtual Surround  
3 Select the desired zoom factor to  
zoom using [Cursor U / D], then  
press [ENTER].  
Picture Quality  
Subtitle  
Angle  
Zoom  
Virtual Surround  
x1.0  
x1.2  
x1.5  
x2.0  
Four options are available, “x1.0”, “x1.2”, “x1.5”  
and “x2.0”.  
The zoom area is displayed.  
EN  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 73 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Programme Playback  
Repeat / Programme Playback /  
Slide Show  
CD  
VCD  
(PBC OFF)  
You can programme the disc to play back in your  
desired order.  
Repeat Playback  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
HDD  
DVD-R  
MP3  
DVD-V  
Setup Menu will appear.  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
CD  
VCD  
(PBC OFF)  
2 Select “Playback” using  
®
®
DivX  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
1 During playback, press [REPEAT]  
repeatedly until desired repeat is  
selected.  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
The selected repeat playback will start.  
The repeat display will display about 5 seconds.  
The following operations are available.  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Title:  
Display  
(Not available during Time shift playback)  
The current title will be played back repeatedly.  
(HDD and DVD)  
Chapter:  
3 Select “CD Playback Mode” using  
The current chapter will be played back  
repeatedly. (HDD and DVD)  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
4 Select “Programme Play” using  
Disc:  
The current disc will be played back repeatedly.  
(Audio CD, Video CD, MP3 and DivX®)  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Playback  
Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Track:  
The current track will be played back repeatedly.  
(Audio CD, Video CD, MP3 and DivX®)  
Still Mode  
Programme Play  
Parental Lock  
Angle Icon  
Slide Show  
PBC  
Group:  
TV System  
V. Replay/Skip Speed  
CD Playback Mode  
Media Select  
DivX(R)VOD  
Initialise  
The current group will be played back repeatedly.  
(MP3 and DivX®)  
Hint  
To cancel the repeat playback, select “Off”. The  
repeat setting is also cancelled when you stop  
playback.  
5 Select the desired track using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER]  
or [Cursor P].  
Note  
• For Video CDs with PBC function, repeat playback  
does not work while PBC function is on.  
Programme Play  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
03 12  
41  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
28  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
34  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
01  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
– –  
Total  
01:23:45  
6 Press [PLAY P] to start programme  
playback.  
EN  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 74 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Hint  
To erase tracks you entered, select the track and  
then press [CLEAR].  
• You can make up to 50 track settings.  
To cancel programme playback, press [STOP S]  
twice during programme playback.  
• You may also select the desired track using  
[the Number buttons] at step 5.  
• For Video CDs, if you select programme playback  
with the PBC function on, the PBC function will be  
turned off automatically and programme playback  
starts.  
Search  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-V  
DVD-R  
MP3  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
CD  
VCD  
(PBC OFF)  
®
®
DivX  
If you are playing the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you are playing a disc, press [DVD] first.  
Using [SKIP B/ F] buttons  
Note  
• During programme playback, if you fast forward the  
track to the end, the playback speed of the next  
track will be normal.  
• During programme playback, you cannot use the  
search function except for the search with  
[SKIP B/ F], [SLOW / REV r] or  
[FWD / SLOW f].  
1 Press [SKIP F] to skip to the next  
title (except HDD) or chapter / track  
during playback.  
To go back to the previous title (except HDD) or  
chapter/track, press [SKIP B] twice in quick  
successions.  
Slide Show  
Using the [SEARCH] button  
By using the [SEARCH] button, you can select  
JPEG  
following search options.  
You can select the display time between 5 seconds  
and 10 seconds.  
Type of search you can select with [SEARCH] button  
HDD  
DVD  
Chapter, Time search  
Chapter, Title, Time search  
Track, Time search  
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in “Programme  
Audio CD, VCD,  
DivX®  
Playback” on page 73.  
MP3  
Track search  
2 Select “Slide Show” using  
1 Select a type of search by pressing  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
[SEARCH].  
3 Select the display time using  
Every time you press [SEARCH], type of search  
changes.  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
4 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
2 Enter the desired chapter, track, title  
number or time to search for using  
[the Number buttons], then press  
[ENTER].  
• Large-size JPEG files take a few moments to be  
displayed.  
Chapter, title, track or time search will start.  
Hint  
• For DVDs, Audio CD, Video CD, MP3 and DivX®,  
you can perform the Title / Track search in stop  
mode.  
• Edit marks can be searched as chapter mark. (See  
page 78.)  
Note  
• During programme playback, search functions are  
not available except the search using  
[SKIP B / F], [SLOW / REV r] or  
[FWD / SLOW f].  
• Time search function is available only in the same  
track or title.  
• For Video CDs with PBC function, search function  
does not work while PBC function is on.  
EN  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 75 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Audio  
/3  
1 English  
Dolby Digital 5.1ch  
Selecting the Format of Audio  
and Video  
You can select the format of audio and video to suit  
the content of the disc you are playing back.  
Switching Subtitles  
VR  
DVD-V  
DVD-RW  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
®
®
Note  
DivX  
• With some discs, it is only possible to change the  
soundtrack from the disc menu. Press  
[DISC MENU] to display the disc menu.  
• When playing back Audio CDs, Video CDs or MP3  
files, you can switch among the left (L), the right (R)  
channel, and stereo (L / R).  
Many DVD-Videos have subtitles in one or more  
languages. The available languages are usually  
printed on the disc case. You can switch subtitle  
languages at any time during playback.  
• If the title contains both main and sub audio, you  
can switch among main, sub or main / sub.  
Press [DVD] first.  
1 During playback, press  
[AV SELECT].  
Picture Adjustment  
You can adjust the picture you are watching according  
to your preferences.  
2 Select “Subtitle” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
1 Press [AV SELECT].  
3 Select the desired subtitle language  
AV Select Menu will appear.  
using [Cursor D].  
Subtitles are displayed in the selected language.  
If you select “Off”, subtitles will disappear.  
2 Select “Picture Quality” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Note  
Picture Quality  
Subtitle  
Angle  
Zoom  
Virtual Surround  
• With some discs, it is only possible to change the  
subtitle language from the disc menu. Press  
[DISC MENU] to display the disc menu.  
• For discs with DivX® files, the screen only displays  
the number of subtitle languages.  
• For VR mode DVD-RW discs, only On and Off is  
available.  
Switching Audio Soundtrack  
VR  
HDD  
DVD-V  
CD  
DVD-RW  
DVD+RW  
For fixed picture settings:  
1 Select “Normal” or “Cinema” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
®
®
MP3  
VCD  
DVD+R  
DivX  
You can select a language for DVDs during playback  
if multiple languages are available.  
Picture Quality  
Normal  
Cinema  
Subtitle  
Angle  
Zoom  
Virtual Surround  
User 1  
User 2  
User 3  
If you are playing the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you are playing a disc, press [DVD] first.  
1 During DVD playback, press  
[AUDIO  
] repeatedly to select one  
of the available languages.  
Audio display appears at the left top of the TV  
screen, and the new audio will be heard. The  
display will disappear after about 5 seconds.  
Normal : To play back with normal picture  
setting.  
Cinema: To play back with picture setting for  
movies.  
EN  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 76 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
For manual picture settings:  
Note  
1 Select “User 1”, “User 2” or “User 3” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [MODE].  
2 Select setup option you want to adjust using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
• If the “Angle” is not selectable, that means the scene  
does not contain the sequences shot from the  
multiple angles.  
• When “Angle Icon” is set to “On” (see page 97), and  
the scene contains the sequences shot from the  
multiple angles, “  
” will appear on the TV screen.  
0
0
Brightness  
Contrast  
Switching Virtual Surround System  
Colour  
0
Sharpness  
Gamma  
0
0
VR  
DVD-RW  
Video  
DVD-RW  
Off  
On  
Auto  
3D NR  
HDD  
DVD-V  
MPEG NR  
Progressive Mode  
DVD-R  
MP3  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
CD  
VCD  
®
®
DivX  
3 Make an adjustment using [Cursor L / P], then  
press [ENTER].  
You can enjoy stereophonic virtual space through  
your existing 2 channel stereo system.  
1 Press [AV SELECT].  
AV Select Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Virtual Surround” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Brightness  
Picture Quality  
Subtitle  
Angle  
0
10  
Zoom  
Virtual Surround  
4 Press [AV SELECT] to exit.  
User Setup options  
default  
Brightness  
Contrast  
Colour  
to adjust brightness  
to adjust contrast  
to adjust colour  
0(dark) - 10(bright)  
-5(weak) - +5(strong)  
-5(pale) - +5(brilliant)  
-5(soft) - +5(clear)  
0
0
0
0
0
Sharpness  
Gamma  
to adjust sharpness  
to adjust darkness  
-1(weak) - +1(strong)  
3 Select “Off”, “Type 1” or “Type 2”  
using [Cursor U / D], then press  
[ENTER].  
to reduce noise in the  
playback picture  
Off, Weak, Middle,  
Strong  
3D NR  
Off  
Off  
to reduce noise  
in the MPEG picture  
MPEG NR  
Off, On  
Picture Quality  
to select suitable signal  
conversion for  
progressive output  
Auto, Film  
(for live-action picture), Auto  
Video(for an animation)  
Progressive  
Mode*  
Subtitle  
Off  
Type 1  
Angle  
Zoom  
Type 2  
Virtual Surround  
*Available only when “Video Out” is set to “Component (Progressive)” in  
the “Initial Setting”. (See page 92.)  
Switching Camera Angles  
DVD-V  
Some DVD-Videos feature scenes shot from two or  
more angles. The disc case is usually marked with an  
angle icon if the disc has multi-angle scenes.  
• Off  
: no effect  
• Type 1 : Natural effect  
• Type 2 : Emphasised effect  
Press [DVD] first.  
Note  
1 During playback, press  
[AV SELECT].  
• Select “Virtual Surround” to “Off” if the sound is  
distorted.  
• The setting will be kept even when the unit is turned  
off.  
AV Select menu will appear.  
2 Select “Angle” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
The angle will switch each time you press  
[Cursor D].  
EN  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 77 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Editing  
1 Editing Menu  
2 Items of Editing Menu  
• Items vary between “Playlist” and “Original”.  
3 Selected device (HDD or DVD)  
4 Channel, starting time, the length of recording  
time and Rec Mode of the selected title  
5 The number of the current Title / the total number  
of the Title  
Use [SKIP F] to jump to the next page. Use  
[SKIP B] to jump to the previous page. Use  
[Cursor U / D] to move among titles one by one.  
6 Preview window (Moving Image)  
7 Selected list type (Original or Playlist for HDD or  
VR mode DVD-RW only)  
8 Selected title  
• Title name  
• Only the highlighted title will be played back in  
the preview window.  
• Protect icon will appear only when the title is  
protected (Original only).  
Guide to the Editing on this Unit  
The following editing menus are three different  
methods depending on how you edit the titles.  
- Add or delete chapter marks manually. (See page  
78.)  
- Create a Playlist, scene delete, combine or divide  
of the title. (See pages 79, 82, 86 and 87.)  
- Edit from the Title List (delete, edit title name or  
protect of the title, etc.). (See pages 81, 84, and 85.)  
Editing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Playlist
Original  
1
[HDDPL]New
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
[HDD PL] Title Combine  
[HDD PL] Title Divide  
[DVD PL] New  
2
[DVD PL] Scene Delete  
[DVD PL] Title Combine  
[DVD PL] Title Divide  
9 Unplayed titles (HDD only)  
10 Pop-up window  
HDD  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
3
6
4
Remain76:13(SP)
Title Name  
001/016
Recording Date  
5
7
8
9
Play
P01
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
Title Delete  
P01
MultipleTitleDelete
P01
New  
New  
P02
Edit Title Name  
Title Protect  
10  
Title TitleSorting  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
Available Editing Menus  
Media  
Video Mode +VR mode  
Item  
HDD  
VR mode DVD-RWs  
Page  
Description  
DVDs  
DVDs  
Original Playlist Original Playlist  
Original  
Original  
Add/Delete Chapter Mark  
Manually  
{
{
{
{
×
78 To add or delete the chapter marks to the title.  
{
New  
×
{
×
{
{
{
{
×
{
×
{
{
{
{
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
79 To add a title to the Playlist.  
82-84 To delete a part of the title.  
86 To combine two titles into one.  
87 To divide a title into two titles.  
Scene Delete  
Title Combine  
Title Divide  
{
×
Title Delete  
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
81 To delete a title.  
Multiple Title Delete  
Edit Title Name  
81 To delete selected titles.  
84 To edit title names.  
×
Protect  
{
×
{
×
{
85 To protect/undo protect the title.  
{: Available  
× : Not available  
Note  
• You can edit a disc recorded using the PAL system. It is impossible to edit discs recorded using the NTSC  
system.  
• It is possible to edit +VR mode recorded / edited on other unit, in case you can undo the finalisation of the disc on  
this unit.  
EN  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 78 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
What Are Original and Playlist?  
Adding or Deleting Chapter  
Marks Manually  
There are 2 types for the title list: Original and Playlist.  
Original:  
Original is the list of the recorded programmes (titles)  
when they are recorded. Original is available for HDD,  
DVD-RW and DVD-R. Please note that editing the  
titles in the Original is like editing the original data. For  
example, if you erase a title in the Original, the title  
cannot be recovered.  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Original  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Playlist  
HDD  
Original  
HDD  
Playlist  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
You can add or delete chapter marks. After a title is  
marked with chapters, you can use the chapter  
search feature.  
You can set a chapter mark anywhere you want.  
You can add up to 999 chapter marks per title for  
DVD-RW, 99 chapter marks per title for  
: Available to edit in the HDD Original  
HDD  
Original  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Original  
: Available to edit in the VR mode  
DVD-RWs Original  
DVD+RW / R and 99 chapter marks per title for HDD.  
To add the chapter marks ...  
Playlist:  
1 Play back the title you want to add  
Playlist is the copy of the Original. You can edit the  
titles in the Playlist as you like without affecting the  
original data in the Original. It works like a back up for  
the Original. Delete a title from the Playlist does not  
delete the corresponding title in the Original. But  
delete a title from the Original, the corresponding title  
in the Playlist will be deleted. Playlist is available only  
for the HDD and the VR mode DVD-RWs. There is no  
Playlist for the Video mode DVD-RWs.  
the chapter marks to.  
2 Press [CHAPTER MARK] at the point  
where you want.  
• A chapter mark will be added.  
Chapter Mark  
Add  
: Available to edit in the HDD Playlist  
HDD  
Playlist  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Playlist  
: Available to edit in the VR mode  
DVD-RWs Playlist  
About Edit Mark:  
Edit marks will be added automatically where title is  
edited, for example where a title is divided or  
Hint  
combined. These marks work as chapter marks when  
you search for a chapter, but cannot be deleted like  
chapter marks. Also, when a title with chapter marks  
are dubbed from DVD to the HDD, those marks  
become edit marks once they are dubbed to the HDD.  
Chapter marks can be added even under the  
conditions listed below:  
- when the playback is paused.  
- when the programme is recording or the recording is  
paused.  
Note  
You can add chapter marks during recording.  
• Remaining time of +VR mode disc may decrease  
when adding chapter marks or increase when  
clearing chapter marks depending on the recording  
time or edited contents.  
• For +VR mode disc, it is not likely to be able to add  
chapter marks up to the maximum recordable  
numbers of chapters, according to time and number  
of chapters.  
To delete the chapter marks ...  
1 Play back the title you want to delete  
the chapter marks from.  
2 Press [PAUSE p].  
3 Select a desired chapter mark to  
delete using [SKIP B / F].  
EN  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 79 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
4 Press [CLEAR].  
• A chapter mark will be deleted.  
Creating Titles to a Playlist  
VR  
Chapter Mark  
Delete  
HDD  
Playlist  
DVD-RW  
Playlist  
You can create a title to the Playlist as you prefer.  
You can make it up to 99 titles for DVDs and 600 titles  
for HDD.  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Editing” using  
Note  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
• You cannot delete chapter marks from a title being  
recorded currently.  
• Edit marks cannot be deleted (see “About Edit  
Mark:” on page 78).  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Display  
3 Select “Playlist” using [Cursor  
U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Editing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Playlist  
Original  
4 Select “[HDD PL] New” or “[DVD PL]  
New” using [Cursor U / D], then  
press [ENTER].  
Editing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Playlist
Original  
[HDDDPPL]New(
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
[HDD PL] Title Combine  
[HDD PL] Title Divide  
[DVD PL] New  
[DVD PL] Scene Delete  
[DVD PL] Title Combine  
[DVD PL] Title Divide  
EN  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 80 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
5 Select a desired title you want to add  
to the Playlist using [Cursor U / D],  
then press [ENTER].  
[HDD PL] New  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
Title Name  
001/016  
Recording Date  
Example: [HDD PL] New  
Playlist Name  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
[HDD PL] New  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
New  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
Title Name 2  
Title Name  
001/016  
Recording Date  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
New  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
New  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
9 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
• For VR mode DVD-RW disc, if the Playlist contains  
more than 99 titles or 999 chapters, “[DVD PL] New”  
cannot be selected.  
• For the HDD, if the Playlist contains more than 600  
titles, “[HDD PL] New” cannot be selected.  
To delete titles from Playlist, refer to “Deleting Titles”  
on pages 81 to 82.  
• The selected title is added to the Playlist.  
• Press [MODE] to switch Original and Playlist if  
necessary.  
6 Select “Select” using [Cursor U/ D],  
then press [ENTER].  
• This function does not work on +VR mode discs.  
[HDD PL] New  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
Title Name  
001/016  
Recording Date  
Select  
P01 12:22 (1:0
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
New  
Title Sorting  
P01 11:22 (0:1
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
New  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
7 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
[HDD PL] New  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
Title Name  
001/016  
Recording Date  
P
/07(Wed)  
/07(Tue)  
/07(Wed)  
/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
New  
Create a Playlist.  
OK to proceed?  
P
P
New  
No  
Yes  
P
Title Name 1  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
8 Input the title name in the Playlist  
Title Name window if necessary.  
Then press [ENTER]. See “Guide to  
Edit Title Name” on page 85.  
• If you want to leave the title name as it is, press  
[ENTER].  
To create another playlist, repeat steps 3 to 8.  
EN  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 81 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
4 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
Deleting Titles  
The title is deleted.  
Be advised that the titles once deleted cannot be  
recovered.  
5 Press [RETURN] or [SETUP] twice to  
With DVD-R / +R discs, deleting titles will not affect  
the recordable disc space.  
exit.  
With Video mode DVD-RW discs, the disc space will  
increase only when the last title in the Original is  
deleted.  
If you delete the title in DVD+RW disc, deleted title will  
be displayed as “Empty Title”. The disc space will  
increase if you delete all title from the Empty Title to  
the newest title memorised in the Title list.  
With HDD and VR mode DVD-RW discs, the disc  
space will increase when any title in the Original is  
deleted.  
Deleting Selected Ttitles  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Original  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Playlist  
HDD  
Original  
HDD  
Playlist  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
You can also delete some titles at once.  
If you edit the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you edit a disc, press [DVD] first.  
Deleting a Playlist will not increase the recordable  
disc space.  
Deleting a title in the Playlist will not delete the  
corresponding title in the Original.  
1 Press [TOP MENU].  
Title List will appear.  
Except for Video mode DVD-RW / R and +VR  
mode DVD+RW / R, press [MODE] to switch  
Original and Playlist if necessary.  
Deleting a Title  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Original  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Playlist  
HDD  
Original  
HDD  
Playlist  
2 Select a desired title to delete using  
Video  
DVD-RW  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
Example: HDD Original  
You can delete a title which you do not need anymore.  
If you edit the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you edit a disc, press [DVD] first.  
HDD  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
1 Press [TOP MENU].  
Remain76:13(SP)
Title Name  
001/016
Recording Date  
Title List will appear.  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
Except for Video mode DVD-RW / R and +VR  
mode DVD+RW / R, press [MODE] to switch  
Original and Playlist if necessary.  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
New  
New  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
Title Name 2  
2 Select a desired title to delete using  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Example: HDD Original  
3 Select “Multiple Title Delete” using  
HDD  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Remain76:13(SP)
Title Name  
001/016
Recording Date  
HDD  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
New  
New  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
Remain76:13(SP)
Title Name  
001/016
Recording Date  
Title Name 2  
Play  
P01
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
Title Name 3  
Title Delete  
P01
Title Name 4  
Multiple Title Delete  
P01
New  
New  
P02 EditTitleName
Title Protect  
Title TitleSorting  
Title Name 3  
3 Select “Title Delete” using  
Title Name 4  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
HDD  
The first “ ” will be marked.  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
Remain76:13(SP)
Title Name  
001/016  
Recording Date  
Play  
P01
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
Title Delete  
P01
Multiple Title Delete  
P01
New  
New  
P02 EditTitleName
Title Protect  
Title TitleSorting  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
Confirmation window will appear.  
EN  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 82 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
4 Continue to select a desired title  
again using [Cursor U / D], then  
press [ENTER].  
Deleting a Scene of a Title  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Original  
VR  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
HDD  
Playlist  
HDD  
Original  
Playlist  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
You can delete a specific scene of a title.  
Even if a scene of a title is deleted from the Playlist,  
the title in the Original will remain as it was, and  
recordable disc space will not increase.  
Remain76:13(SP)
Title Name  
002/016
Recording Date  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
New  
New  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Setup Menu will appear.  
Title Name 4  
2 Select “Editing” using  
The second “ ” will be marked.  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
If you want to clear the check mark of a title,  
select the title, then press [ENTER].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
” mark will disappear.  
Disc Management  
Editing  
Dubbing  
5 When all the titles are selected,  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
press [CLEAR].  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
HDD  
Display  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
Remain76:13(SP)
Title Name  
002/016
Recording Date  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
3 Select “Playlist” or “Original” using  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
New  
New  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
Editing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Playlist  
Original  
Confirmation window will appear.  
6 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
The selected titles are deleted.  
Note  
• You cannot delete a title in a folder and other titles at  
the same time.  
4 Select “[HDD ORG] Scene Delete” or  
“[DVD ORG] Scene Delete” in  
“Original”, or “[HDD PL] Scene  
Delete” or “[DVD PL] Scene Delete”  
in “Playlist” using [Cursor U / D],  
then press [ENTER].  
EN  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 83 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Example: Playlist  
You can use [PLAY P], [SLOW / REV r],  
[FWD / SLOW f], [SKIP B/ F],  
[VARIABLE REPLAY], [VARIABLE SKIP],  
[PAUSE p] or [STOP S] (which is substitute for  
[PAUSE p]) to find the start point easily.  
• If you want to quit the process, press [SETUP]  
to exit.  
Editing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Playlist
Original  
[HDD PL] New  
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
[HDD PL] Title Combine  
[HDD PL] Title Divide  
[DVD PL] New  
[STOP S] works as described below while  
searching for the Start/End point:  
[DVD PL] Scene Delete  
[DVD PL] Title Combine  
[DVD PL] Title Divide  
While in play: to pause the playback.  
While in pause: to jump back to the beginning of  
the title.  
8 When it reaches the desired start  
5 Select a desired title you want to  
delete a scene from, then press  
[ENTER].  
point, press [ENTER].  
A start point is marked on the progress bar and  
the highlight moves to the window on the right.  
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
(1:04:40)  
T
1
1
1:04:40  
C
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
01/01/07(Mon) 12:22  
Duration after editing : 1:04:40  
Playlist  
001/016  
Creation Date  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
Start 0:31:00  
End 0:00:00  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
• If you want to reset the start point, press  
[CLEAR]. Or press [RETURN], then follow the  
steps 5 to 7 again.  
• If you want to quit the process, press [SETUP]  
to exit.  
6 Select “Select” using [Cursor U/ D],  
then press [ENTER].  
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
(1:04:40)  
9 Press [PLAY P] to start play back  
again.  
001/016  
Playlist  
Select  
Creation Date  
Play the title up to the point where you want to set  
an end point for the scene to be deleted.  
You can use [PLAY P], [SLOW / REV r],  
[FWD / SLOW f], [SKIP B/ F],  
[VARIABLE REPLAY], [VARIABLE SKIP],  
[PAUSE p] or [STOP S] (which is substitute for  
[PAUSE p]) to find the end point easily.  
P01 12:22 (1:0
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
Title Sorting  
P01 11:22 (0:1
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
7 Press [PLAY P] to start playback.  
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
T
1
1
1:04:40  
C
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
01/01/07(Mon) 12:22  
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
Duration after editing : 1:04:40  
T
1
1
1:04:40  
C
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
01/01/07(Mon) 12:22  
Duration after editing : 1:04:40  
Start 0:31:00  
End 0:31:01  
Start 0:00:00  
End 0:00:00  
Play the title up to the point where you want to set  
a start point of the scene to be deleted.  
EN  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 84 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
10 When it reaches the desired end  
point, press [ENTER].  
Editing Title Names  
VR  
An end point is marked on the progress bar.  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Playlist  
HDD  
Original  
HDD  
Playlist  
DVD-RW  
Original  
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
T
1
1
1:04:40  
C
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
01/01/07(Mon) 12:22  
Duration after editing : 1:04:36  
Video  
DVD-RW  
total time  
after  
deleting  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
You can name titles or change the title names from  
this menu.  
The names you put on the titles will be displayed on a  
Title List.  
Start 0:31:00  
End 0:35:00  
chapter  
mark  
If you edit the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you edit a disc, press [DVD] first.  
seam after deleting  
deleted scene  
1 Press [TOP MENU].  
Title List will appear.  
start point  
Except for Video mode DVD-RW / R and +VR  
mode DVD+RW / R, press [MODE] to switch  
Original and Playlist if necessary.  
• If you want to reset the end point, press  
[RETURN] twice, then follow the steps 5 to 9  
again.  
2 Select a desired title to edit using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Title window will appear.  
• If you want to quit the entire process, press  
[RETURN] repeatedly.  
11 Select “Delete” using [Cursor U/ D],  
Example: HDD Original  
then press [ENTER].  
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
HDD  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
T
1
1
1:04:40  
C
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
01/01/07(Mon) 12:22  
Duration after editing : 1:00:40  
Remain76:13(SP)
Title Name  
001/016
Recording Date  
Select more  
Delete  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
New  
New  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
Start 0:31:00  
End 0:35:00  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
If you want to select more scenes…  
3 Select “Edit Title Name” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
The first letter will be highlighted.  
Select “Select more”. Then follow steps 5 to 10.  
12 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
HDD  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
T
1
1
1:04:40  
C
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
01/01/07(Mon) 12:22  
Duration after editing : 0:55:40  
Remain76:13(SP)
Title Name  
001/016
Recording Date  
Play  
P01
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
Title Delete  
P01
OK to delete?  
Multiple Title Delete  
P01
New  
New  
P02
Edit Title Name  
Title Protect  
No  
End 0:50:00  
Yes  
Title TitleSorting  
Title Name 3  
Start 0:45:00  
Title Name 4  
The scene is deleted.  
13 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
• If a certain scene is deleted from the title in the  
Original, the title in the Playlist that contains the  
corresponding scene will be deleted also.  
• Title List cannot be deleted or changed when a title  
or disc has been protected or during recording.  
• For Original only, “Preview” appears at step 11. By  
selecting it you can preview the result of scene  
deletion.  
EN  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 85 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
4 To enter a title name, refer to “Guide  
to Edit Title Name” below.  
Protecting / Undo Protecting  
Titles  
HDD  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Original  
DVD-R  
HDD  
Original  
Remain76:13(SP)
Title Name  
001/016
Recording Date  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
To prevent accidental editing or title erasing, you can  
protect the contents.  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
New  
New  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
Title Name 2  
If you edit the HDD, press [HDD] first.  
If you edit a disc, press [DVD] first.  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
1 Press [TOP MENU].  
5 When you finish entering the title  
name, press [ENTER] again.  
Your setting is activated.  
Title List will appear.  
2 Select a desired title to protect using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
6 Press [RETURN] or [SETUP] twice to  
Example: HDD Original  
exit.  
HDD  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
Guide to Edit Title Name  
Following the list below, press [the Number Buttons]  
Remain76:13(SP)
001/016
Title Name  
Recording Date  
repeatedly until the desired letter appears.  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
Press  
New  
New  
0
space , 0  
Title Name 2  
! # $ % & ‘ ( ) * +  
, – . / : ; < = > ?  
Title Name 3  
1
Title Name 4  
@ [ \ ] _ { } ~ ` 1  
Select a desired item using  
[Cursor U/ D/ L/ P], then  
press [ENTER].  
3 Select “Protect” using  
ABC  
2
ABC  
DEF  
abc  
def  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
press  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The protect icon will appear on the list.  
GHI  
ghi  
...  
A B C a  
JKL  
jkl  
HDD  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
Remain76:13(SP)
Title Name  
001/016
Recording Date  
WXYZ  
wxyz  
Play  
P01
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
Title Delete  
P01
• If you want to enter the same letters successively,  
for example if you want to enter AA, press [ENTER]  
Multiple Title Delete  
P01
New  
New  
P02 EditTitleName
Title Protect  
after you enter the first A (  
2
), then enter the other  
Title TitleSorting  
Title Name 3  
A by pressing ( ) one more time.  
2
Title Name 4  
• Press [Cursor P] for a space.  
• Press [Cursor L / P] to move the cursor to the left  
or right.  
• Press [Cursor L] to insert a letter in the letters  
entered.  
• Press [CLEAR] to erase letters one by one.  
• If the letters are completed, press [ENTER] again.  
• You can enter up to 64 letters, for the titles in the  
HDD, the VR mode DVD-RWs and the Video mode  
DVD-RW / R.  
If the title has already been protected, “Undo  
Protect” will be listed on the window instead of  
“Protect”. To cancel the protection, select “Undo  
Protect” and press [ENTER]. The protect icon will  
disappear.  
4 Press [RETURN] or [SETUP] twice to  
exit.  
To protect the VR mode DVD-RW and DVD+RW  
discs themselves, refer to “Setting Disc  
Protection” on page 58.  
Note  
• Unidentified letters in a title name are shown by “ ”.  
If you delete them, adjoining letters may change to  
*
“ ” or other.  
*
EN  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 86 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
5 Select a desired title (title 1) using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Combining Titles  
VR  
[HDD PL] Title Combine  
(1:04:40)  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
Playlist  
Playlist  
Playlist  
001/016  
Creation Date  
You can combine two titles into a single title.  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
2 Select “Editing” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
6 Select “Select” using [Cursor U/ D],  
then press [ENTER].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
The first “ ” will be marked.  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
7 Select a title to combine (title 2)  
using [Cursor U / D], then press  
[ENTER].  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Display  
[HDD PL] Title Combine  
(1:04:40)  
Playlist  
004/016  
Creation Date  
3 Select “Playlist” using  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Editing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Playlist  
Original  
Title Name 4  
The second “ ” will be marked and Confirmation  
window will appear.  
8 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
[HDD PL] Title Combine  
(1:04:40)  
4 Select “[HDD PL] Title Combine” or  
“[DVD PL] Title Combine” using  
Playlist  
004/016  
Creation Date  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
4/07(Wed)  
4/07(Tue)  
4/07(Wed)  
4/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
OK to combine?  
No  
Yes  
Title Name 1  
Editing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Title Name 2  
Playlist
Original  
Title Name 3  
[HDD PL] New  
Title Name 4  
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
[HDD PL] Title Combine  
[HDD PL] Title Divide  
[DVD PL] New  
Two titles will be combined into a single title.  
[DVD PL] Scene Delete  
[DVD PL] Title Combine  
[DVD PL] Title Divide  
[HDD PL] Title Combine  
(1:37:20)  
Playlist  
001/015  
Creation Date  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
Title Name 1  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
Title Name 5  
9 Press [SETUP].  
Confirmation window will appear.  
EN  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 87 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
10 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER] to exit.  
Dividing a Title  
Note  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Playlist  
HDD  
HDD  
• If the number of chapter marks in the combined title  
exceeds 999 (99 for HDD), the combination will be  
rejected.  
Original  
Playlist  
You can divide a title into two new titles.  
• If one of two titles in the Original is deleted, the  
combined new title will be deleted.  
• The name of the title selected first will become the  
name of the combined title.  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
• The title selected first will be the first half of the  
combined title.  
• If the length of the title exceeds 12 hours after  
combined, the combination will be rejected.  
• You only can combine the titles in the same folder.  
2 Select “Editing” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Display  
3 Select “Playlist” or “Original” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Editing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Playlist  
Original  
4 Select “[HDD PL] Title Divide” or  
“[DVD PL] Title Divide” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Example: Playlist  
Editing  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Playlist  
Original  
[HDD PL] New  
[HDD PL] Scene Delete  
[HDD PL] Title Combine  
[HDD PL] Title Divide  
[DVD PL] New  
[DVD PL] Scene Delete  
[DVD PL] Title Combine  
[DVD PL] Title Divide  
EN  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 88 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
5 Select a desired title you want to  
7 When it reaches the desired dividing  
point, press [ENTER], or press  
[PAUSE p] or [STOP S] and then  
[ENTER].  
divide, then press [ENTER].  
[HDD PL] Title Divide  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
Playlist  
001/016  
Creation Date  
[HDD PL] Title Divide  
T
1
1
1:04:40  
C
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
01/01/07(Mon) 12:22  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
P01 11:22 (0:14:13) XP  
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
0:32:00  
0:32:00  
0:32:40  
6 Select “Select” using [Cursor U/ D],  
then press [ENTER].  
8 Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
[HDD PL] Title Divide  
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
The title is divided.  
Playlist  
001/016  
Creation Date  
9 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
• If an internal HDD or a DVD disc contains the  
maximum number of titles (HDD: 600, DVD-RW  
disc: 99), you cannot divide any titles.  
P01 12:22 Select
11/04/07(Wed)  
10/04/07(Tue)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
09/04/07(Mon)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
11/04/07(Wed)  
Title Sorting  
P01 11:22 
P01 11:19 (0:00:06) SP  
P02 09:19 (0:22:40) SP  
Title Name 1  
Title Name 2  
Title Name 3  
Title Name 4  
• With DVD-RW disc, you cannot divide the titles if the  
total number of chapters has already reached 999.  
• You can use [PLAY P], [SLOW / REV r],  
[FWD / SLOW f], [SKIP B/ F],  
[VARIABLE REPLAY], [VARIABLE SKIP],  
[PAUSE p] or [STOP S] (which is substitute for  
[PAUSE p]) to find the divide point easily.  
• If you want to quit the process, press [SETUP]  
to exit.  
[STOP S] works as described below while  
searching for the divide point:  
While in play: to pause the playback.  
While in pause: to jump back to the beginning of  
the title.  
[HDD PL] Title Divide  
T
1
1
1:04:40  
C
P01 12:22 (1:04:40) XP  
01/01/07(Mon) 12:22  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
1:04:40  
EN  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 89 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Function Setup  
Tour of the Setup Menus  
The following table shows the items which you can change the setting and their default settings. Refer to the  
following table for your convenience.  
Setup Menu  
Initial Setting  
Items  
Selection  
(highlight is the default)  
Contents  
OSD Language  
Page 27  
Set the language for OSD  
(on-screen display).  
English  
Français  
Español  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Svenska  
Nederlands  
Clock Setting  
Clock Setting  
Page 31  
Set the clock manually.  
Auto Clock Setting  
Page 30  
Set the clock automatically.  
Channel Setting  
Auto Tuning  
Page 27  
Tune the channels  
automatically.  
Manual Tuning  
Page 28  
Tune the channels manually.  
Move  
Move the channel to different  
position.  
Page 29  
TV Aspect  
Page 32  
Set a picture size according to  
aspect ratio of your TV.  
4 : 3 Letter Box  
4 : 3 Pan & Scan  
16 : 9 Wide  
16 : 9 Shrink  
Select Video  
Page 56  
Set the video input type for  
the external input.  
Video In  
S-Video In  
Video Out  
Page 92  
Sets the video output signal to  
be fixed accordingly to your  
TV set.  
SCART(RGB)  
Component (Progressive)  
Component (Interlace)  
Digital Audio  
Setting  
Down Sampling  
Page 93  
Set whether the sound  
recorded at 96 kHz is down  
sampled to 48 kHz or not.  
48kHz  
96kHz  
Dolby Digital  
Page 93  
Set the type of sound signal  
output from the digital audio  
output jack.  
Bit Stream  
PCM  
MPEG  
Bit Stream  
PCM  
Set the digital audio output  
signal specification.  
Page 93  
DTS  
Set whether DTS signal is  
output or not.  
On  
Off  
Page 94  
Dynamic Range Control  
Page 94  
Compress the range of sound  
volume.  
On  
Off  
EN  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 90 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Setup Menu  
Playback  
Items  
Selection  
(highlight is the default)  
Contents  
Language  
Audio Language  
Page 94  
Set the language for audio.  
Original  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Swedish  
Dutch  
Other  
Subtitle Language  
Page 95  
Set the language for subtitles.  
Off  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Swedish  
Dutch  
Other  
Disc Menu Language  
Page 95  
Set the language for Disc  
Menu.  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Swedish  
Dutch  
Other  
DivX Subtitle  
Page 95  
Set the language for DivX®  
Subtitle.  
Off  
English  
French  
German  
Spanish  
Italian  
Dutch  
Swedish  
Russian  
Polish  
Still Mode  
Set the still mode.  
Auto  
Field  
Frame  
Page 96  
Parental Lock  
Page 96  
Set the parental level for DVD  
disc playback.  
All  
Level 8 to 1  
Angle Icon  
Page 97  
On  
Off  
Set whether or not to display  
the angle icon.  
TV System  
Page 97  
Set the TV system.  
PAL  
Auto  
V. Replay/Skip Speed  
Page 97  
Variable Skip  
Set the amount of skip time  
when you press  
[VARIABLE SKIP].  
15 seconds  
30seconds  
1 minute  
Variable Replay  
Set the amount of rewind time  
when you press  
15 seconds  
[VARIABLE REPLAY].  
30 seconds  
1 minute  
CD Playback Mode  
Pages 73-74  
Programme Play  
Slide Show  
Set the disc to play back in  
your desired order.  
Set the display time.  
5 seconds  
10 seconds  
PBC  
On  
Off  
Enable you to play back  
interactive software using  
menu screens.  
Media Select  
Page 66  
Set the media to play for discs  
contains mixture of different  
type of media.  
Video  
Audio  
Picture  
DivX(R)VOD  
Page 66  
Provide DivX® VOD  
registration code.  
Initialise  
Page 97  
Initialise  
Yes  
Return the initial settings to  
the factory default.  
No  
EN  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 91 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Setup Menu  
Recording  
Items  
Selection  
(highlight is the default)  
Contents  
Auto Chapter [HDD]  
Page 39  
5 minutes  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
60 minutes  
Off  
Insert chapter marks every  
set time interval.  
Noise Reduction  
Page 98  
Strong  
Weak  
Off  
Reduce some noise in  
playback picture or to record  
in LP/EP/SLP mode.  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
Page 40  
Set the audio type for  
recording.  
Main  
Sub  
Fast Dubbing Audio (Video Mode)  
Page 98  
On  
Off  
Set the HDD bilingual  
recording audio for fast  
dubbing.  
External Input Audio  
Page 46  
Set the external input audio  
type for recording.  
Stereo  
Bilingual  
Recording Audio Select [XP]  
Page 41  
Set the recording audio type.  
(Only when the Rec Mode is  
set to XP.)  
Dolby Digital  
LPCM  
Initialise  
Page 97  
Initialise  
Yes  
Return the initial settings to  
the factory default.  
No  
Display  
FL Dimmer  
Page 99  
Set the brightness of the  
Front Panel Display.  
Auto  
Bright  
Dark  
Display Device Status  
Page 99  
Set the operating display.  
Set the background colour.  
Set the Screen Saver.  
On  
Off  
Background Colour  
Page 99  
On  
Off  
Screen Saver  
Page 99  
On  
Off  
Note  
• If you change the settings in the Setup Menus, the information of the contents remain memorised even after the  
power is turned off or the disc tray is opened or closed.  
EN  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 92 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
SCART(RGB):  
Select “SCART(RGB)” if your TV has a scart  
terminal and connected to it.  
Component (Progressive):  
Initial Setting  
If your TV is compatible with progressive  
scanning, select “Component (Progressive)”.  
Component (Interlace):  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
If your TV has component jacks, select  
“Component (Interlace)”.  
2 Select “Initial Setting” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
5 When you finish with the setting,  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
press [SETUP] to exit.  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Display  
3 Select “Video Out” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Initial Setting  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
OSD Language  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
Select Video  
Video Out  
Video Out (Default: SCART(RGB))  
Set the video output signal to be fixed accordingly to  
your TV set.  
4 Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Initial Setting  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
OSD Language  
Clock Setting  
Channel Setting  
TV Aspect  
SCART(RGB)  
Component(Progressive)  
Component(Interlace)  
Select Video  
Video Out  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
EN  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 93 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Note  
When playing back disc with copyright protection:  
• Even if you select “96kHz”, the sound will be down  
sampled at 48 kHz.  
Digital Audio Setting  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
2. Dolby Digital (Default: Bit Stream)  
Set the Dolby Digital.  
2 Select “Digital Audio Setting” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on the left.)  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Select “Dolby Digital” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Option window will appear.  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Recording  
Display  
Bit Stream  
PCM  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
3 Select a desired item using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Bit Stream: Outputs Dolby Digital signals.  
If your amplifier / decoder is compatible  
with Dolby Digital, set to “Bit Stream”.  
Digital Audio Setting  
Down Sampling  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
PCM:  
Converts the Dolby Digital into PCM  
(2 channel).  
Dolby Digital  
MPEG  
DTS  
If your amplifier / decoder is NOT  
compatible with Dolby Digital, set to  
“PCM”.  
Dynamic Range Control  
Hint  
When playing back the HDD or a DVD-RW disc  
recorded in VR mode:  
• If the audio source on a disc is in Dolby Digital  
format, set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” so that you can  
switch to main audio (L), sub audio (R), or a  
combination of both (L / R) using your amplifier /  
decoder.  
4 Refer to 1. to 5. on pages 93 to 94  
and set the selected item.  
5 When you finish with the setting,  
press [SETUP] to exit.  
3. MPEG (Default: PCM)  
Set the MPEG.  
1. Down Sampling (Default: 48kHz)  
Set the Down Sampling.  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on the left.)  
Select “MPEG” using [Cursor U/ D],  
then press [ENTER].  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 above.)  
Select “Down Sampling” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Option window will appear.  
Option window will appear.  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Bit Stream  
PCM  
48kHz  
96kHz  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
Bit Stream: Outputs MPEG Audio signals.  
If your amplifier / decoder is compatible  
with MPEG, set to “Bit Stream”.  
48kHz: If your amplifier / decoder is NOT compatible  
with 96 kHz PCM, select “48kHz”. Sound  
recorded at 96 kHz is down sampled to  
48 kHz.  
96kHz: If your amplifier / decoder is compatible with  
96 kHz PCM, select “96kHz”. Sound is  
sampled at 96 kHz.  
PCM:  
Converts MPEG into PCM.  
If your amplifier / decoder is NOT  
compatible with MPEG, set to “PCM”.  
EN  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 94 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
4. DTS (Default: On)  
Set the DTS.  
Playback  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on page 93.)  
Select “DTS” using [Cursor U / D],  
then press [ENTER].  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Playback” using  
Option window will appear.  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
On  
Off  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
On: Outputs DTS signals.  
Display  
If your amplifier / decoder is compatible with  
DTS, set to “On”.  
Off: No DTS signal is output.  
If your amplifier / decoder is NOT compatible  
with DTS, set to “Off”.  
3 Select a desired item using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
5. Dynamic Range Control (Default: On)  
Set to “On” to make the dynamic range narrower.  
Playback  
Language  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Still Mode  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on page 93.)  
Select “Dynamic Range Control”  
using [Cursor U / D], then press  
[ENTER].  
Parental Lock  
Angle Icon  
TV System  
V. Replay/Skip Speed  
CD Playback Mode  
Media Select  
DivX(R)VOD  
Initialise  
Option window will appear.  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
4 Refer to 1. to 10. on pages 94 to 97  
On  
Off  
and set the selected item.  
5 When you finish with the setting,  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
press [SETUP] to exit.  
1. Audio Language (Default: Original)  
Set the Audio language.  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 above.)  
Select “Language” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Language Menu will appear.  
Select “Audio Language” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Disc Menu Language  
DivX Subtitle  
EN  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 95 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Select the desired language using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
3. Disc Menu Language (Default: English)  
Set the Disc Menu language.  
Audio Language  
Original  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Swedish  
Dutch  
Other  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on page 94.)  
Select “Language” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Language Menu will appear.  
Select “Disc Menu Language” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
If “Original” is selected, the audio language is the  
default of the inserted disc.  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Disc Menu Language  
DivX Subtitle  
2. Subtitle Language (Default: Off)  
Select the desired language using  
Set the Subtitle language.  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on page 94.)  
Select “Language” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Language Menu will appear.  
Disc Menu Language  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Select “Subtitle Language” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Swedish  
Dutch  
Other  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Disc Menu Language  
DivX Subtitle  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
Select the desired language using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
4. DivX Subtitle (Default: Off)  
You can set the DivX® Subtitle language.  
Subtitle Language  
Off  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Swedish  
Dutch  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on page 94.)  
Select “Language” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Language Menu will appear.  
Other  
Select “DivX Subtitle” using  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Disc Menu Language  
DivX Subtitle  
If “Other” is selected, enter the  
appropriate 4-digit code using  
[the Number buttons]. Refer to  
“Language Code” on page 108.  
Select the desired language using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Subtitle Language  
Please enter language code  
DivX Subtitle  
-
-
-
-
Off  
English  
French  
German  
Spanish  
Italian  
When you finish entering the code,  
press [ENTER].  
Dutch  
Swedish  
Russian  
Polish  
Note  
• You can also change or turn off the subtitles on a  
DVD from the disc menu if it is available.  
• Press [CLEAR] to erase numbers entered  
incorrectly.  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
• You can only select the languages supported by the  
inserted disc.  
• The Audio language setting and the subtitle  
language setting may not be available for some  
discs.  
EN  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 96 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
• When the password has been set already, the  
5. Still Mode (Default : Auto)  
Set the still mode.  
password will be displayed as “ ” for your  
*
security.  
-If the password you have entered is wrong, the  
error message will appear.  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on page 94.)  
Select “Still Mode” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Option window will appear.  
Incorrect password.  
OK  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Press [ENTER] and enter the correct  
4-digit password again.  
Auto  
Field  
Frame  
2 Select a desired level using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
Rating Explanation:  
• All -  
Parental Controls is inactive; all discs can  
play.  
Virtually all DVD software of any grade  
(adult/general/children) can be played back.  
Auto:  
Automatically select the best resolution  
setting (“Frame” or “Field”) based on the  
data characteristics of the pictures.  
Select “Field” when the pictures are still  
unstable even if “Auto” is selected. “Field”  
stabilises the pictures, although the picture  
quality may become coarse due to the  
limited amount of data.  
• 8 -  
Field:  
• 7 to 2 - Only DVD software intended for general use  
and children can be played back.  
• 1 -  
Only DVD software intended for children  
can be played back.  
Frame: Select “Frame” to display relatively  
motionless pictures in higher resolution.  
“Frame” improves the picture quality,  
3 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
B: When you want to change the password,  
although it may unstabilise the pictures due  
to simultaneous output of two Field data.  
1 Enter the 4-digit password in the  
password input field using  
Note  
• An individual picture on TV screen is called as  
Frame, which consists of two separate images  
called as Field. Some pictures may be blurred at the  
“Auto” setting in still mode due to their data  
characteristics.  
[the Number buttons] (the password  
will be displayed as “ ” for your  
*
security), then press [ENTER].  
Parental Lock  
6. Parental Lock (Default: All)  
Password  
Rating  
Change Password  
You can set the Parental Lock Level to keep your  
children from viewing the inappropriate materials.  
All  
****  
Change Password input field will appear.  
(Follow the steps 1 to 2 on page 94.)  
Select “Parental Lock” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Parental lock window will appear.  
• If you want to set a parental lock, proceed to A.  
• If you want to change the password, proceed to  
B.  
2 Select Change Password input field  
using [Cursor L / P].  
3 Enter the new 4-digit password in the  
password input field using  
[the Number buttons], then press  
[ENTER].  
A: When you want to set a parental lock,  
4 Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
1 Enter the 4-digit password in the  
password input field using  
[the Number buttons], then press  
[ENTER].  
• Some DVD-Videos feature the Parental Lock  
function. If the rating of the inserted disc exceeds  
the level you set, playback will stop. You must enter  
a password before the disc will be played back.  
• The parental lock function may not be available on  
some discs.  
Parental Lock  
Password  
Rating  
Change Password  
1234  
All  
• It may be difficult to determine if some DVDs  
support the parental lock function. Be sure to  
confirm that the parental lock function operates in  
the way that you have set.  
• When the password has not been set yet, the  
numbers will be displayed during entering the  
password. After that, the numbers will change to  
• Record the password in case you forget it.  
“ ”.  
*
EN  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 97 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
• Press [CLEAR] to erase numbers entered  
incorrectly.  
If you forget your password or you want to clear all  
settings in Parental Lock, press and hold [CLEAR]  
for 8 seconds. Your password is cleared and  
parental levels are set to “All”.  
9. V. Replay/Skip Speed  
Assign the [VARIABLE REPLAY] or  
[VARIABLE SKIP] button to rewind or skip by a  
certain amount of time.  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on page 94 and see page 72.)  
Select “V. Replay/Skip Speed” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Sub Menu will appear.  
7. Angle Icon (Default: Off)  
You can set to “On” to show the Angle icon on the  
screen whenever the feature is available.  
Select a desired item to set using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on page 94 and see page 76.)  
Select “Angle Icon” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Variable Skip  
Variable Replay  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Refer to the explanations below and set the  
selected item.  
On  
Off  
Variable Skip (Default: 30 seconds)  
Sets the amount of skip time for  
[VARIABLE SKIP].  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
Variable Skip  
15 seconds  
30 seconds  
1 minute  
8. TV System (Default: PAL)  
You can set the TV system.  
Variable Replay (Default: 15 seconds)  
Sets the amount of rewind time for  
[VARIABLE REPLAY].  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on page 94.)  
Select “TV System” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Variable Replay  
15 seconds  
30 seconds  
1 minute  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
PAL  
10. Initialise (Default: No)  
Auto  
Initialise the setting in Playback.  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on page 94.)  
PAL: Outputs a modified PAL signal for viewing  
discs recorded with the NTSC system on a  
PAL system TV.  
Auto: Changes the video system (PAL / NTSC)  
automatically according to the format of  
the inserted disc.  
Select “Initialise” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Confirmation window will appear.  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
Note  
• With discs recorded using the PAL system, a PAL  
signal is output for viewing on a PAL system TV.  
• Discs recorded with the PAL system cannot be  
viewed on an NTSC system TV.  
Initialise  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Initialising the playback settings.  
Setting will be reset to the factory default.  
OK to proceed?  
• With discs recorded using the NTSC system, an  
NTSC signal is output for viewing on an NTSC or  
Multi system TV.  
No  
Yes  
• With discs recorded using the NTSC system, select  
PAL to view on a PAL system TV.  
Your setting in Playback will be initialised.  
EN  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 98 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
2. Fast Dubbing Audio (Video Mode)  
(Default: Off)  
Recording  
On: When recording a bilingual programme to the  
HDD and to make the Fast Dubbing (HDD to DVD  
(Video Mode)) available, the unit only records  
either Main or Sub audio. (See page 40.)  
Off: When recording a bilingual programme to the  
HDD, the unit will record both Main and Sub  
audio, however, this makes it impossible to  
perform the Fast Dubbing (HDD to DVD (Video  
Mode)).  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Recording” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
Editing  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on the left.)  
Select “Fast Dubbing Audio (Video  
Mode)” using [Cursor U / D], then  
press [ENTER].  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
Recording  
Option window will appear.  
Display  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
3 Select a desired item using  
On  
Off  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
Recording  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Auto Chapter [HDD]  
Noise Reduction  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
Fast Dubbing Audio (Video Mode)  
External Input Audio  
Recording Audio Select [XP]  
Initialise  
3. Initialise (Default: No)  
Initialise the setting in Recording.  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on the left.)  
Select “Initialise” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Confirmation window will appear.  
4 Refer to 1. to 3. on this page and set  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor L / P],  
then press [ENTER].  
the selected item.  
5 When you finish with the setting,  
press [SETUP] to exit.  
Initialise  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
1. Noise Reduction (Default: Off)  
Set the noise reduction to reduce some noise in  
playback picture or to record in LP/EP/SLP mode.  
Initialising the recording settings.  
The Settings will be returned to  
their factory default.  
OK to proceed?  
No  
Yes  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 above.)  
Select “Noise Reduction” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Option window will appear.  
Your setting in Recording will be initialised.  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Strong  
Weak  
Off  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
EN  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 99 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
2. Display Device Status (Default: On)  
Set the operating display.  
Display  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on the left.)  
1 Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
Select “Display Device Status” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Option window will appear.  
Setup Menu will appear.  
2 Select “Display” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Setup Menu  
Disc Management  
On  
Off  
Editing  
Dubbing  
Timer Programme  
Title List  
Initial Setting  
Digital Audio Setting  
Playback  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
Recording  
On: Shows the operating display.  
Off: Does not show the operating display.  
Display  
3. Background Colour (Default: On)  
Set the background colour.  
When there is no signal for the picture signal input,  
the screen changes to blue background.  
3 Select a desired item using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on the left.)  
Display  
01/01/07(Mon) 19:34  
Select “Background Colour” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Option window will appear.  
FL Dimmer  
Display Device Status  
Background Colour  
Screen Saver  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
On  
Off  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
4 Refer to 1. to 4. on this page and set  
the selected item.  
4. Screen Saver (Default: On)  
You can set to “On” to activate the Screen Saver after  
15 minutes of no activity.  
5 When you finish with the setting,  
press [SETUP] to exit.  
1. FL Dimmer (Default: Auto)  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 on the left.)  
Set the front panel display brightness.  
You can choose one from “Auto,” “Bright” and “Dark”.  
If “Auto” is selected, the display gets dark when the  
power is off.  
Select “Screen Saver” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Option window will appear.  
Select the desired setting using  
(Follow steps 1 to 2 above.)  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Select “FL Dimmer” using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
Option window will appear.  
On  
Off  
Select the desired setting using  
[Cursor U / D], then press [ENTER].  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
Auto  
Bright  
Dark  
The selected setting will be checked and  
activated.  
EN  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 100 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
VCR Functions  
2 Press [VCR].  
3 Press [REC I] to start recording.  
Playback  
To temporarily stop recording or to resume it,  
VCR  
press [PAUSE p].  
1 Press [ ON / STANDBY] to turn on  
the unit.  
To play back a tape, turn on the TV and be sure to  
select the input to which the unit is connected.  
2 Press [VCR].  
3 Insert a pre-recorded tape, then  
press [PLAY P] to begin playback.  
4 During playback, press [PAUSE p].  
After the unit has been in pause mode for 5  
minutes, it will stop automatically to protect the  
tape and the video head from damage.  
Playback will be paused and sound will be muted.  
5 Press [PLAY P] to resume playback.  
4 Press [STOP S] when the recording  
6 Press [STOP S] to stop playback.  
is completed.  
7 Press [OPEN / CLOSE O] to eject the  
Accidental erasure prevention  
To prevent accidental recording on a recorded  
cassette, remove its record tab. To record on it later,  
cover the hole with cellophane tape.  
tape.  
Note  
• When a tape without record tab is inserted, the unit  
will start playback automatically.  
• Tracking will be automatically adjusted upon  
playback. To adjust the tracking manually, press  
Record tab  
[PROG.  
/
].  
Note  
• Although you can playback a videotape recorded in  
the SP or LP mode on this unit, SLP mode recording  
is not available.  
Recording and One-touch Timer  
Recording (OTR)  
• Timer Recording is not available for VCR.  
• When VCR recording and the Timer Recording are  
overlapping, the Timer Recording has its priority.  
• The unit will automatically switch to the programmed  
channel 15 seconds before the programmed time,  
and the VCR recording will be cancelled except  
when their recording channel is the same. If their  
recording channel is the same, the Timer Recording  
will start without cancelling the VCR recording, and  
the recording will be made on both VCR and the  
HDD / DVD.  
Basic Recording  
VCR  
Before recording, make sure:  
• The desired channel is selected by pressing  
[the Number buttons] or [PROG.  
remote control.  
• There is a tape with a record tab in the unit.  
• The desired recording speed is selected in SP  
(standard play) or LP (long play) mode by pressing  
[REC MODE] on the remote control.  
/
] on the  
To view one channel while recording another:  
If you want to watch the TV programmes, simply  
select the channel you want to watch with the TV’s  
remote.  
Tape speed  
Recording / Playback Time  
E120 E180 E240  
Type of tape E60  
SP mode  
LP mode  
1 hour 2 hours 3 hours 4 hours  
2 hours 4 hours 6 hours 8 hours  
1 Turn on the unit and insert a  
recordable tape.  
Make sure that the TV input is set on the unit.  
EN  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 101 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
One-touch Timer Recording  
Search  
VCR  
This feature allows you to set the recording length  
simply by pressing [REC I].  
Index Search  
1 Turn on the unit and insert a  
recordable tape.  
VCR  
An index mark will be assigned at the beginning of  
each recording you make. You may skip to a specific  
marked point by following the steps below.  
Make sure that the TV input is set on the unit.  
2 Press [VCR].  
1 Press [VCR].  
3 Select the recording speed using  
2 Press [SEARCH] to display the index  
[REC MODE]. (See page 100.)  
search menu.  
4 Select the desired channel to record  
3 Enter the number of recordings you  
using [PROG.  
/
] or  
want to skip using  
[the Number buttons].  
[the Number buttons] within 30  
seconds.  
5 Press [REC I] repeatedly until the  
desired recording time (15 minutes  
to 4 hours) appears on the TV  
screen.  
4 Press [FWD / SLOW f] or  
[SLOW / REV r] to start index  
search.  
One-touch Timer Recording will start.  
If you want to go in the forward direction, press  
[FWD / SLOW f].  
If you want to go in the reverse direction, press  
[SLOW / REV r].  
After index search, the VCR will play back the  
tape automatically.  
0:15  
(Normal Recording)  
0:30  
Note  
4:00  
3:45  
• This function is not available during recording.  
• When the unit reaches the specified time, it will be  
turned off automatically.  
To change the recording length during One-touch  
Timer Recording, press [REC I] repeatedly until the  
desired length appears.  
Time Search  
VCR  
This feature allows you to go to a specific point on a  
tape by entering the exact amount of time you want to  
skip in order to reach the point.  
To cancel One-touch Timer Recording within the  
specified time, press [STOP S].  
Note  
1 Press [VCR].  
• The remaining recording time will appear on the  
front panel display during a One-touch Timer  
Recording. Press [DISPLAY] can also see the  
remaining recording time on the TV screen.  
• You cannot pause a One-touch Timer Recording.  
• When VCR recording and the Timer Recording are  
overlapping, the Timer Recording has its priority.  
• The unit will automatically switch to the programmed  
channel 15 seconds before the programmed time,  
and the VCR recording will be cancelled except  
when their recording channel is the same. If their  
recording channel is the same, the Timer Recording  
will start without cancelling the VCR recording, and  
the recording will be made on both VCR and the  
HDD / DVD.  
2 Press [SEARCH] repeatedly until the  
time search menu appears.  
3 Enter your desired time to skip using  
[the Number buttons] within 30  
seconds.  
4 Press [FWD / SLOW f] or  
[SLOW / REV r] to start time  
search.  
If you want to go in the forward direction, press  
[FWD / SLOW f].  
If you want to go in the reverse direction, press  
[SLOW / REV r].  
After time search, the unit will play back the tape  
automatically.  
Note  
• This function is not available during recording.  
• Press [STOP S] to stop the search.  
• If the tape reaches the end during the Search, this  
unit will cancel it and rewind the tape.  
EN  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 102 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Other Operations  
Hi-Fi Stereo Sound System  
This unit will record and playback Hi-Fi stereo sound.  
In addition, it has an AV2 and NICAM stereo sound  
decoder. This unit will receive stereo and bilingual  
broadcasts and it is possible to record in several ways  
and to play back the sound.  
VCR  
Press [VCR] first.  
To cue or review picture during playback  
(Picture Search):  
Press [FWD / SLOW f] or [SLOW / REV r]  
during playback.  
Press it again and the unit will search in super high  
speed.  
Selecting the Sound Mode  
You can select each mode by pressing [AUDIO  
on the remote control. Each mode is indicated on the  
TV screen as following.  
]
To freeze the picture on TV screen during  
playback (Still mode):  
• During playback of the recorded tape in Hi-Fi mode  
Press [PAUSE p] during playback. Each time you  
press the button, the picture will be forwarded frame  
by frame.  
If the picture begins to vibrate vertically during the still  
mode, stabilise the picture by pressing the  
Display on  
Mode  
Audio output  
the TV screen  
STEREO  
LEFT  
Stereo  
Stereo  
[PROG.  
/
].  
If the picture is distorted or rolling vertically, adjust the  
vertical hold control on your TV, if equipped.  
L
L audio from both speakers  
R audio from both speakers  
To reset the tape counter:  
R
RIGHT  
Press [CLEAR].  
Normal Monaural  
MONO  
To play back in slow motion:  
Press [FWD / SLOW f] during the still mode.  
If the noise bars appear on the TV screen, you can  
• During reception of bilingual broadcasts  
reduce it by pressing [PROG.  
/
].  
Display on  
the TV screen  
Mode  
Audio output  
Note  
• Still / Slow mode will be automatically cancelled  
after 5 minutes to prevent damage to the tape and  
the video head.  
To return to normal play back from the Picture  
Search / Still / Slow mode, press [PLAY P].  
Main audio from the both  
speakers  
Main  
Sub  
Main  
Sub  
Sub audio from the both  
speakers  
• Main audio from the left  
speaker  
• Sub audio from the right  
speaker  
Main /  
Sub  
Main  
Sub  
Changing the Video Colour  
System  
VCR  
Note  
Press [VCR] first.  
• If you play back non-Hi-Fi tapes, the unit will play  
back automatically in monaural even if you select  
any mode.  
Different countries use different television colour  
systems.  
• If the stereo signal becomes weak, the broadcast is  
automatically recorded in monaural.  
This unit will distinguish the video colour system  
(MESECAM or PAL) automatically according to the  
format of a pre-recorded video tape during playback  
or the input signal from the tuner or external devices.  
To change the video colour system manually, press  
[MODE].  
Each time you press [MODE], the colour system will  
change as follows.  
AUTO MESECAM PAL  
Note  
• If the playback picture on the TV screen is black and  
white, change the video colour system manually.  
• When you change the video colour system  
manually, be sure to change it before recording. If  
you select the wrong video colour system for  
recording, the colour of the picture may be  
deteriorated.  
EN  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 103 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Others  
Troubleshooting  
Before requesting service for this unit, check the table below for a possible cause of the problem you are experiencing.  
Some simple checks or a minor adjustment on your part may eliminate the problem and restore proper performance.  
Error message for HDD/DVD  
Possible Cause  
Solution  
Operation could not be completed  
successfully.  
There may be a problem with the disc.  
• The disc may be dirty or have  
scratches.  
• Check and clean the disc if necessary.  
(See pages 5 and 12.)  
• Nothing has been recorded yet.  
• There is no title in the Original.  
• Record some programmes. (See page  
42.)  
There is no title in the original list.  
There is no playlist.  
• Playlist has not been created yet.  
• +VR mode disc or Video mode disc  
may be inserted.  
• Create a Playlist first. (See page 79.)  
• There is only one title in the Playlist. It  
requires more than two titles to perform  
this editing feature.  
• Create more than two titles in the  
Playlist. (See page 79.)  
There are no editable playlists.  
No more titles can be added.  
The number of titles exceeds the limit.  
• You only can register up to 18 titles in  
the Dubbing Title List.  
• Delete unnecessary titles from the  
Dubbing Title List. (See page 53.)  
Cannot perform the dubbing.  
The title is copy-protected.  
• Undubbable disc, such as DVD-Video  
disc, may be inserted.  
• Insert a dubbable disc. (See page 48.)  
• Insert a dubbable disc. (See page 48.)  
• The disc may be unrecordable, or there  
is no disc in the unit.  
Cannot perform the dubbing.  
Cannot perform the dubbing.  
Insufficient disc space.  
• The space in the recording media is not  
enough for the dubbing.  
• Make sufficient space in the recording  
media.  
• You are trying to dub a copy-once  
programme to a non-CPRM compatible  
disc. Copy-once programmes can only  
be moved to a CPRM compatible disc.  
Cannot perform the dubbing.  
Use a CPRM compatible disc.  
• Use a CPRM compatible disc.  
• There may be insufficient space in the  
HDD because the Fast Dubbing from  
DVD to HDD and the HDD recording  
are proceeding simultaneously.  
• Check the dubbing title or the recording  
media.  
Could not perform the dubbing.  
• You are not allowed to edit a Timer  
Programme during or 10 seconds  
before the Timer Recording of the  
selected Timer Programme.  
• Stop the recording if you want to edit  
the Timer Programme in recording.  
(See pages 42 and 43.)  
The operation is currently unavailable.  
All or part of the programme will not be  
recorded.  
• Timer Programmes may be  
overlapping.  
• Check the Timer Programmes.  
• Enter correct password. If you have  
forgotten the password, press and hold  
[CLEAR] for 8 seconds.  
Incorrect password.  
• Incorrect password was entered.  
Cannot read disc.  
Either the disc is unsupported, or it is  
scratched or dirty.  
• The disc may not be supported by this  
unit, or it may be dirty or have  
scratches.  
• Use only the discs supported by this  
unit (see page 60), or clean the disc if  
necessary (see pages 5 and 12).  
• Use only the discs with the region code  
supported by this unit. (See pages 10  
and 60.)  
Region Code Error.  
Cannot play disc.  
• The disc’s region code is not supported  
by this unit.  
• You are trying to record when total title  
number is already at the limit.  
• Delete unnecessary titles. (See page  
81.)  
Number of recordable titles exceeded.  
Total number of chapters exceeds the  
limit.  
• You are trying to record when total  
chapter number is already at the limit.  
• Delete unnecessary chapters. (See  
page 78.)  
Recording is stopped.  
There are some problems with the  
disc.  
• The disc may be dirty or have  
scratches.  
• Check and clean the disc if necessary.  
(See pages 5 and 12.)  
• Turn the power off, then on again. If the  
problem cannot be solved yet, please  
call an Authorised Service Centre.  
HDD Error.  
DVD Error.  
• Turn the power off, then on again. If the  
problem cannot be solved yet, please  
call an Authorised Service Centre.  
EN  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 104 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Error message for HDD/DVD  
Possible Cause  
Solution  
• Make sufficient space in the recording  
media, or change the Rec Mode. (See  
page 35.)  
Insufficient disc space in the recording  
media.  
• The space in the recording media is not  
enough for the selected Rec Mode.  
Cannot dub because the allowable  
number of Edit Marks or chapters has  
been exceeded.  
• You are trying to dub when total chapter  
or Edit Mark number in the DVD is  
already at its limit.  
• Delete unnecessary chapters in the  
DVD. (See page 78.) (Edit Marks  
cannot be deleted.)  
• The space in the recording media is not  
enough.  
• Make sufficient space in the recording  
media.  
Insufficient disc space.  
EN  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 105 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
T
Symptom  
Solution  
The power does not turn on.  
• Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.  
• Batteries of the remote control are weak.  
The unit turns on automatically without any  
operation.  
• The unit turns on automatically 2 minutes before the Timer Recording.  
The OSD Language Menu appears every  
time the power turns on.  
• Finish up the Language Setting procedure by selecting a language in the  
OSD Language Menu. Press [ENTER] to activate the setting.  
The power turns off automatically.  
• The power turns off automatically when abnormality is detected on the  
disc. Press [  
ON / STANDBY] or [OPEN / CLOSE O] on the unit to  
open the disc tray, and before it is opened completely, press the button  
again. Then take out the disc.  
• The power turns off automatically when an OTR is completed.  
Symptom  
Solution  
The unit does not function.  
• “ ” or error message appears if the operation is prohibited.  
• Batteries of the remote control are weak or exhausted.  
No picture, sound or menu appears on the  
screen.  
• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.  
• Check if the cables are damaged.  
• Check if a correct external input channel is selected on your TV. (See  
page 25.)  
• Check if you have completed the Channel Setting. (See pages 27 to 30.)  
Clock Setting and Channel Setting cannot be  
performed.  
• If a recording is in progress, these operations cannot be performed.  
The unit does not operate properly.  
• Moisture has condensed inside the unit. Remove the disc and leave the  
unit turned on for about two hours until the moisture evaporates. (See  
page 3.)  
Symptom  
Solution  
TV channels cannot be changed.  
• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.  
• Check if the cables are damaged.  
• Try Channel Setting by following the steps on pages 27 to 30.  
Only specific channels do not appear.  
• The channels may be set to be skipped. (See page 28.)  
The external input channels (such as AV1,  
AV2 or AV3) cannot be skipped.  
• This unit does not skip the external input channels. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Symptom  
Solution  
The image from the external device  
cannot be displayed or recorded.  
• Try pressing [INPUT SELECT  
] repeatedly.  
• Turn on all connected devices.  
• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.  
Recording is impossible.  
• This unit cannot record programmes that contain copy protection signal.  
This is not a malfunction.  
• The space of the recording media may be used up. Try deleting  
unnecessary titles from the Original, or exchange it with the recordable  
media.  
• The maximum number of titles or chapters has exceeded.  
Delete the unnecessary titles to make enough space or insert a new  
recordable media.  
• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.  
Timer Recording cannot be performed.  
Recording is impossible.  
• The internal clock of the unit may have been stopped due to a power  
failure that lasted for more than 30 seconds. Reset the clock. (See pages  
30 to 31.)  
• Copy-once programmes can only be recorded on a CPRM compatible  
VR mode DVD-RW.  
• Check if the disc is protected or finalised. Undo the protection or the  
finalisation.  
• DVD-RW once formatted with other DVD recorders cannot be recorded  
on this unit. This is not a malfunction.  
• Video mode DVDs recorded by other DVD recorders cannot be used on  
this unit unless finalised.  
• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.  
Recording is impossible.  
• Check if a videotape is inserted.  
• Check if a videotape has a record tab intact.  
EN  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 106 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Symptom  
Solution  
TV aspect ratio does not match your TV  
screen.  
• Check the TV Aspect Ratio. (See pages 32 to 33.)  
• A different aspect ratio will be used when the aspect ratio specified by the  
disc is not supported by this unit.  
Playback picture is distorted.  
Colour of the picture is abnormal.  
• During fast forward or fast reverse, playback picture may be distorted.  
This is not a malfunction.  
• Connect to TV directly. When you connect this unit with the television via  
VCR or other devices, the picture may be distorted due to the copy-  
protection signal.  
• Check if the cables are damaged.  
• Keep the equipment which may cause electrical disturbances, such as a  
cellular phone, away.  
There is no sound, or no subtitle.  
• Turn on all connected devices.  
• Check if the external input channel is set correctly.  
• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.  
Playback does not start from the  
beginning.  
• Resume function may be activated. See page 69 to cancel the resume  
point.  
Playback cannot be performed.  
• Check if the playable disc is inserted.  
• Check if the disc is loaded correctly with the labelled side facing up.  
• Discs made on other devices or on personal computers cannot be played  
back on this unit unless it is finalised on the device.  
Even if it is finalised, the performance of those discs are not guaranteed  
on this unit.  
• The disc may be dirty or flawed. Clean the disc.  
• Check if all the connections are made correctly.  
• Check the Parental Lock Setting. (See page 96.)  
There is no sound, or no subtitle.  
• Check if the Digital Audio Setting is set correctly. (See pages 93 to 94.)  
• There is a possibility that the selected subtitle language is not supported  
by the disc.  
Digital Audio Setting cannot be changed  
to main audio (L), sub audio (R) or  
combination of both.  
• If the audio source is in the Dolby Digital format, set the Dolby  
Digital Setting to “PCM” in the Setup Menu. (See page 93.)  
Audio Language or the Subtitle  
Language of the DVD cannot be  
changed.  
• Multilingual subtitles are not supported by the disc.  
• Some audio languages or the subtitle languages can be changed only  
from the Disc Menu. Please refer to the disc’s manual.  
Camera angles cannot be changed.  
• Even though the multi-angle feature is supported by the disc, that does  
not mean all the scenes are shot from multi-angles.  
Changing angles are available only for those scenes shot from the multi-  
angle.  
The disc cannot be played back on other  
player even though it is finalised properly.  
• Some DVD players do not play back the disc made on other recorder.  
Refer to the manual of the unit.  
VCR picture is noisy.  
• Adjust the tracking by pressing [PROG.  
videotape.  
/
] while you are playing a  
During VCR playback, pictures do not  
come out even though sound does.  
• VCR Head cleaning may be necessary.  
Refer to “AUTO HEAD CLEANING” on page 5.  
EN  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 107 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Symptom  
Solution  
Titles cannot be edited or deleted.  
• The titles or the disc itself may be protected. Cancel the protection by  
following the steps on page 85 for title protection and page 58 for disc  
protection.  
The capacity of the disc doesn’t increase  
even if the recorded programme is  
deleted.  
• Deleting a title in the Playlist will not increase the capacity, try deleting a  
title in the Original.  
Dubbing cannot be executed.  
• When the number of the titles or the chapters exceeds the maximum  
recordable number, the dubbing will not be executed.  
• Copy-once programmes or the copy protected programmes may not be  
dubbed depending on the recording media.  
Regarding the limitations on dubbing, refer to the page 48.  
Titles cannot be edited or deleted.  
• The titles in the Video mode / VR mode discs cannot be edited or deleted  
if they are finalised. Undo the finalisation by following the steps on page  
57.  
The capacity of the disc doesn’t increase  
even if the recorded programme is  
deleted.  
• With Video mode DVD-RW discs, the disc space will increase only when  
the last title in the Original is deleted. With DVD-R / +R discs, deleting a  
title will not increase the disc space.  
Dubbing cannot be executed.  
• Video mode discs made on other recorder cannot be dubbed using this  
unit.  
Symptom  
Solution  
The remote control does not function.  
• No batteries in the remote or the batteries may be weak.  
Replace the batteries.  
• Make sure there is no obstacle between the remote and the unit.  
• Try getting closer to the unit. (See page 20.)  
• Make sure to press the Device Select Buttons ([HDD], [DVD] or [VCR])  
before operating on the device of your choice.  
• If above solutions do not solve the problem, please call an Authorised  
Service Centre.  
Setup Menu Screen does not display when  
[SETUP] is pressed.  
• While the disc is loading, [SETUP] does not respond.  
Symptom  
Solution  
The Clock display does not appear in the  
Front Panel Display.  
• Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.  
• (In case of power failure) Check the breaker and Clock Setting.  
When you forget the password for Parental  
Lock.  
• Please cancel the password and the set level. (See page 96.)  
* If you are still having trouble with this unit after checking “Troubleshooting”, write down the error message and  
the error description, and please call an Authorised Service Centre.  
EN  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 108 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Language Code  
Language  
Code  
4748  
4747  
4752  
6563  
4759  
4764  
5471  
4765  
4771  
4772  
4847  
5167  
4860  
5072  
4854  
4855  
4864  
4853  
5971  
4851  
5759  
4947  
7254  
4961  
5464  
4965  
5047  
6058  
5160  
5161  
5166  
5261  
5256  
5255  
Language  
Code  
5264  
5271  
5358  
5747  
5051  
5158  
5758  
5360  
5367  
5447  
5569  
5455  
5467  
5565  
5560  
5547  
5551  
5557  
5347  
5566  
5647  
5669  
5760  
5765  
5757  
6469  
5771  
6460  
5761  
5767  
5861  
5847  
5868  
5860  
Language  
Code  
5866  
5957  
5953  
5965  
5958  
5966  
5955  
5964  
5961  
5960  
6047  
6051  
6061  
6149  
6164  
6159  
6247  
6265  
5247  
6258  
6266  
6367  
6459  
6461  
6467  
6559  
6553  
6547  
5350  
6564  
6554  
6566  
6660  
6560  
Language  
Code  
6550  
6555  
6565  
6557  
6558  
6561  
5165  
6567  
6569  
6568  
6658  
6653  
6647  
6666  
6652  
6654  
4861  
6655  
6661  
6665  
6664  
6657  
6669  
6757  
6764  
6772  
6855  
6861  
4971  
6961  
7054  
5655  
7161  
7267  
Abkhazian  
French  
Lithuanian  
Sindhi  
Afar  
Frisian  
Macedonian  
Malagasy  
Malay  
Singhalese  
Siswat  
Slovak  
Slovenian  
Somali  
Spanish  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Swedish  
Tagalog  
Tajik  
Afrikaans  
Albanian  
Amharic  
Arabic  
Galician  
Georgian  
German  
Greek  
Malayalam  
Maltese  
Armenian  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Greenlandic  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Maori  
Marathi  
Moldavian  
Mongolian  
Nauru  
Hebrew  
Hindi  
Basque  
Bengali;Bangla  
Bhutani  
Bihari  
Nepali  
Hungarian  
Icelandic  
Indonesian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiak  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
Tamil  
Tatar  
Oriya  
Telugu  
Thai  
Bislama  
Breton  
Oromo (Afan)  
Panjabi  
Tibetan  
Tigrinya  
Tonga  
Bulgarian  
Burmese  
Byelorussian  
Cambodian  
Catalan  
Chinese  
Corsican  
Croatian  
Czech  
Pashto; Pushto  
Persian  
Irish  
Italian  
Polish  
Tsonga  
Turkish  
Turkmen  
Twi  
Japanese  
Javanese  
Kannada  
Kashmiri  
Kazakh  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Rhaeto-Romance  
Romanian  
Russian  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
Kinyarwanda  
Kirghiz  
Samoan  
Uzbek  
Danish  
Sangho  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Welsh  
Dutch  
Kirundi  
Sanskrit  
English  
Korean  
Scots Gaelic  
Serbian  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Faroese  
Fiji  
Kurdish  
Wolof  
Laothian  
Latin  
Serbo-Croatian  
Sesotho  
Xhosa  
Yiddish  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
Latvian; Lettish  
Lingala  
Setswana  
Shona  
Finnish  
EN  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 109 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Glossary  
Analogue audio  
Dolby Digital  
Playlist  
An electrical signal that directly  
represents sound. In contrast,  
digital audio can also be an  
electrical signal, but is an indirect  
representation of sound. See also  
Digital audio.  
A system developed by Dolby  
Laboratories that compresses  
digital sound. It works with stereo  
(2ch) or multi-channel audio.  
From this list you can play back  
contents of a disc in your desired  
order or in sequence. It is also  
possible to directly search for a  
specific scene.  
DTS  
(Digital Theater System)  
Region code  
Aspect ratio  
DTS is a multi channel surround  
Regions associate discs and  
The width of a TV screen relative to  
its height. Conventional TVs are 4:3  
(i.e., the screen is almost square).  
Widescreen models are 16:9 (the  
screen is almost twice as wide as its  
height).  
sound system, but it is different from players with particular areas of the  
Dolby Digital. DTS surround sound  
technologies were developed by  
DTS, Inc.  
world. This unit will only play back  
discs that have compatible region  
codes. You can find the region code  
of your unit by looking on the rear  
panel. Some discs are compatible  
with more than one region (or all  
regions).  
Finalise  
To make DVDs that have been  
recorded playable in DVD players,  
finalise DVD-RW / R and  
Chapter  
Just as a book is split up into  
several chapters, a title on a DVD  
disc is usually divided into chapters.  
See also Title.  
Sampling frequency  
DVD+RW / R discs with this unit.  
The rate at which sound is  
measured by a specified interval to  
turn it into digital audio data. The  
number of samples in one second is  
defined as the sampling frequency.  
The higher the rate is, the better the  
possible sound quality.  
JPEG  
(Joint Photographic Experts  
Group)  
CPRM  
(Content Protection for  
Recordable Media)  
JPEG is a method of compressing  
still image files. You can copy JPEG  
files on CD-RW / R discs from a  
computer and play back the files on  
this unit.  
CPRM is a scrambling copy  
protection system for the protection  
of “copy-once” broadcast  
programmes (e.g. some satellite  
broadcasts).  
S-Video output  
Video is output as the individual  
signals of colour(C) and  
MP3  
luminance(Y), so a higher-quality  
picture will be displayed.  
(MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
Digital audio  
MP3 is a method of compressing  
files. You can copy MP3 files on CD-  
RW / R discs from a computer and  
play back the files on this unit.  
An indirect representation of sound  
using numbers. During recording,  
the sound is measured at discrete  
intervals (44,100 times a second for  
CD audio) by an analogue-to-digital  
converter, generating a stream of  
numbers. On playback, a digital-to-  
analogue converter generates an  
analogue signal based on these  
numbers. See also Sampling  
Title  
(DVD)  
A collection of chapters on a DVD.  
See also chapter.  
PBC (Video CD only)  
(Playback Control)  
(Video CD)  
This function enables you to play  
back interactive software using a  
menu screen. See also Title.  
The contents of a Video CD. When  
playing back a Video CD with the  
PBC function, the title menu will  
appear automatically.  
frequency and Analogue audio.  
PCM  
(Pulse Code Modulation)  
Track  
PCM is a format that converts audio  
into digital data. It is mainly used for  
Audio CDs and DAT. This unit can  
play back sounds as realistic as  
possible by converting even  
Audio CDs and Video CDs use  
tracks to divide the contents of a  
disc. The DVD equivalent is called a  
chapter. See also Chapter.  
compressed Dolby Digital and  
MPEG audio to PCM.  
EN  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 110 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
Specifications  
General  
System  
HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-RW / R, DVD+RW / R, VCD, CD-DA,  
CD-RW / R, Video Cassette Tape  
VCR video heads  
HDD  
Four heads  
Internal 3.5 inch HDD 160 GB  
220–240 V ± 10%, 50 Hz ± 0.5%  
60 W (standby: 8.0 W)  
5.8 kg  
Power requirements  
Power consumption  
Weight  
Dimensions (width x height x depth)  
Operating temperature  
Operating humidity  
TV format  
435 x 99.5 x 380 mm  
5°C to 40°C  
Less than 80% (no condensation)  
PAL / SECAM - BG / DK  
Recording  
Recording format  
Video Recording format (DVD-RW only),  
Video format (DVD-RW, DVD-R)  
+VR format (DVD+RW, DVD+R)  
Recordable discs  
DVD-ReWritable, DVD-Recordable, DVD+ReWritable,  
DVD+Recordable  
Video recording format  
Sampling frequency  
Compression format  
13.5 MHz  
MPEG2  
Audio recording format  
Sampling frequency  
Compression format  
48 kHz  
Dolby Digital  
Tuner  
Receivable channels  
E2-E69  
Input/Output  
Front Panel : (AV3)  
Video input  
Input level  
One RCA connector  
1 Vp-p (75 )  
S-Video input  
Input level  
One Mini DIN 4-pin jack  
Y (Iuminance) 1 Vp-p (75 )  
C (colour) 300 mVp-p (75 )  
Audio input  
Input level  
Two RCA connectors  
2 Vrms (input impedance: more than 10 k)  
Rear Panel  
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal  
Audio input /output  
VHF/UHF set 75 Ω  
Two 21-pin scart sockets (AV1, AV2)  
Video input /output  
Input /output level  
Two 21-pin scart sockets (AV1, AV2)  
1Vp-p (75 ) each  
S-Video output  
Output level  
One Mini DIN 4-pin jacks  
Y (Iuminance) 1 Vp-p (75 )  
C (colour) 300 mVp-p (75 )  
Component video out  
Output level  
Three RCA connectors  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 )  
PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 ) each  
Analogue audio output  
Output level  
Two RCA connectors  
2 Vrms (output impedance: 680)  
Digital audio out  
Output level  
One Coaxial pin jack  
500 mVp-p (75 )  
Note  
• The specifications and design of this unit are subject to change without notice.  
EN  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3B90ED_EN.book Page 111 Friday, February 23, 2007 12:38 PM  
EN  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Toshiba Laptop X800 User Manual
Troy Bilt Trimmer TB32CS User Manual
Uniden Car Satellite Radio System Bearcat 880 User Manual
Uniden Cordless Telephone DSS3450+1 User Manual
Uniden Cordless Telephone UIP 160P User Manual
Uniden Cordless Telephone XS915 User Manual
Uniden Two Way Radio POLARIS User Manual
Velodyne Acoustics Speaker VA 1012X User Manual
Vivanco Switch 23407 User Manual
Waterford Appliances Stove LEPRECHAUN 90 OSA User Manual